Pioneer Stereo System VSX 84TXSI User Manual
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-84TXSi  
VSX-84TXSi-S  
VSX-82TXS  
VSX-82TXS-S  
Register your product at  
www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)  
www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
The lightning flash with arrowhead, within  
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert  
the user to the presence of uninsulated  
"dangerous voltage" within the product's  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
CAUTION:  
The exclamation point within an equilateral  
triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR  
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS  
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
D1-4-2-3_En  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
READ INSTRUCTIONS — All the safety and  
operating instructions should be read before the  
product is operated.  
RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS — The safety and  
operating instructions should be retained for  
future reference.  
HEED WARNINGS — All warnings on the product  
and in the operating instructions should be  
adhered to.  
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS — All operating and use  
instructions should be followed.  
CLEANING — The product should be cleaned only  
with a polishing cloth or a soft dry cloth. Never  
clean with furniture wax, benzine, insecticides  
or other volatile liquids since they may corrode  
the cabinet.  
ATTACHMENTS — Do not use attachments not  
recommended by the product manufacturer as  
they may cause hazards.  
WATER AND MOISTURE — Do not use this  
product near water — for example, near a  
bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry  
tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming  
pool; and the like.  
ACCESSORIES — Do not place this product on an  
unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.  
The product may fall, causing serious injury to a  
child or adult, and serious damage to the  
product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table recommended by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any  
mounting of the product should follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a  
mounting accessory recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION  
OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY — Never push  
objects of any kind into this product through  
openings as they may touch dangerous voltage  
points or short-out parts that could result in a  
fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any  
kind on the product.  
SERVICING — Do not attempt to service this  
product yourself as opening or removing covers  
may expose you to dangerous voltage or other  
hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service  
personnel.  
•
If this product is equipped with a polarized  
alternating current line plug (a plug having one  
blade wider than the other), it will fit into the  
outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If  
you are unable to insert the plug fully into the  
outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should  
still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace  
your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety  
purpose of the polarized plug.  
•
If this product is equipped with a three-wire  
grounding type plug, a plug having a third  
(grounding) pin, it will only fit into a grounding  
type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you  
are unable to insert the plug into the outlet,  
contact your electrician to replace your obsolete  
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the  
grounding type plug.  
DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE — Unplug this  
product from the wall outlet and refer servicing  
to qualified service personnel under the  
following conditions:  
•
When the power-supply cord or plug is  
damaged.  
•
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen  
into the product.  
POWER-CORD PROTECTION — Power-supply  
cords should be routed so that they are not likely  
to be walked on or pinched by items placed  
upon or against them, paying particular  
attention to cords at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the product.  
OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING — If an  
outside antenna or cable system is connected to  
the product, be sure the antenna or cable  
system is grounded so as to provide some  
protection against voltage surges and built-up  
static charges. Article 810 of the National  
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides  
information with regard to proper grounding of  
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of  
the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit,  
size of grounding conductors, location of  
antenna-discharge unit, connection to  
•
•
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the product does not operate normally by  
following the operating instructions. Adjust only  
those controls that are covered by the operating  
instructions as an improper adjustment of other  
controls may result in damage and will often  
require extensive work by a qualified technician  
to restore the product to its normal operation.  
If the product has been dropped or damaged in  
any way.  
•
•
When the product exhibits a distinct change in  
performance — this indicates a need for service.  
REPLACEMENT PARTS — When replacement parts  
are required, be sure the service technician has  
used replacement parts specified by the  
manufacturer or have the same characteristics  
as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions  
may result in fire, electric shock, or other  
hazards.  
SAFETY CHECK — Upon completion of any service  
or repairs to this product, ask the service  
technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper  
operating condition.  
WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING — The product  
should not be mounted to a wall or ceiling.  
HEAT — The product should be situated away from  
heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,  
stoves, or other products (including amplifiers)  
that produce heat.  
CART — A product and cart combination should be  
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force,  
and uneven surfaces may cause the product  
and cart combination to overturn.  
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the  
grounding electrode. See Figure A.  
LIGHTNING — For added protection for this  
product during a lightning storm, or when it is  
left unattended and unused for long periods of  
time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This  
will prevent damage to the product due to  
lightning and power-line surges.  
POWER LINES — An outside antenna system  
should not be located in the vicinity of overhead  
power lines or other electric light or power  
circuits, or where it can fall into such power  
lines or circuits. When installing an outside  
antenna system, extreme care should be taken  
to keep from touching such power lines or  
circuits as contact with them might be fatal.  
OVERLOADING — Do not overload wall outlets,  
extension cords, or integral convenience  
receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or  
electric shock.  
VENTILATION — Slots and openings in the cabinet  
are provided for ventilation and to ensure  
reliable operation of the product and to protect  
it from overheating, and these openings must  
not be blocked or covered. The openings should  
never be blocked by placing the product on a  
bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This  
product should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless  
proper ventilation is provided or the  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
WIRE  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered  
to.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810-20)  
POWER SOURCES — This product should be  
operated only from the type of power source  
indicated on the marking label. If you are not  
sure of the type of power supply to your home,  
consult your product dealer or local power  
company.  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810-21)  
LOCATION – The appliance should be installed in a  
stable location.  
GROUND CLAMPS  
NONUSE PERIODS – The power cord of the  
appliance should be unplugged from the outlet  
when left un-used for a long period of time.  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250, PART H)  
Fig. A  
NEC — NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
D1-4-2-2_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate  
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
05 Listening to your system  
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Loading the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Using the Home THX modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 30  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
02 5 minute guide  
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . . 9  
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Better sound using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
06 Using the tuner  
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
03 Connecting your equipment  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other  
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other  
video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Connecting digital audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs . . 16  
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
AM loop antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting external antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
AC outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
07 The System Setup menu  
Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Acoustic Calibration EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Bass Peak Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
04 Controls and displays  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Sub remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
08 Other connections  
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Watching photos and video content. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Connecting your XM Radio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Listening to XM Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Using the i.LINK interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Checking the i.LINK inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
About i.LINK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
About PQLS rate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Creating an i.LINK network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . 54  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 54  
Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Second Zone speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Bi-wiring your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Connecting additional amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Multi-room listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Making multi-room connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Using the multi-room controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Switching components on and off using the  
Programming signals from other remote controls . . 71  
Erasing one of the remote control button settings . . 72  
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Renaming input source names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown  
sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Controls for TVs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
12 Additional information  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
i.LINK interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
i.LINK messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
iPod messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
XM radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . 84  
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Listening modes with different input signal  
12 volt trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display. . . 60  
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma  
display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 62  
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 62  
09 Other Settings  
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 64  
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Multi-Room Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays. . . . . . . . . . 65  
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Stream direct with different input signal formats . . . 88  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
10 Using other functions  
Setting the AV options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Playing a different source when recording. . . . . . . . 67  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Watching video and audio sources independently . . 68  
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Checking your system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Resetting the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or  
cords associated with accessories sold with the  
product will expose you to chemicals listed on  
proposition 65 known to the State of California and  
other governmental entities to cause cancer and  
birth defect or other reproductive harm.  
Wash hands after handling  
D36-P4_A_En  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires  
repair will be charged for even during the warranty  
11 Controlling the rest of your system  
Setting the remote to control other components . . . . 71  
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
period.  
K041_En  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1:  
Before you start  
Checking what’s in the box  
Installing the receiver  
Please check that you've received the following supplied  
accessories:  
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a  
level and stable surface.  
• Setup microphone (cable: 16.4 ft.)  
• Remote control unit  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off  
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.  
– in direct sunlight  
• Sub room remote control unit (VSX-84TXSi only)  
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries (VSX-84TXSi) x4 / (VSX-  
82TXS) x2  
– in damp or wet areas  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
• iPod cable  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)  
• Warranty card  
• These operating instructions  
Loading the batteries  
Main remote control unit:  
Ventilation  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat dispersal  
(at least 8 in. (20 cm) at the top). If not enough space is  
provided between the unit and walls or other equipment,  
heat will build up inside, interfering with performance  
and/or causing malfunctions.  
Sub room remote control unit (VSX-84TXSi Only):  
8 inches  
(20 cm)  
Receiver  
Slot and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation and to protect the equipment from  
overheating. To prevent fire hazard, do not place anything  
directly on top of the unit, make sure the openings are  
never blocked or covered with items (such as  
newspapers, table-cloths and curtains), and do not  
operate the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
Caution  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as  
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries  
properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
• Batteries with the same shape may have different  
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
C5hampteri2n: ute guide  
3
Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by  
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.  
Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV to this  
receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV if you  
don’t know how to do this.  
Introduction to home theater  
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to  
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like  
you're in the middle of the action or concert. The  
surround sound you get from a home theater system  
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the  
source and the sound settings of the receiver.  
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.  
4
Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up  
your system.  
See Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC) below for more on this.  
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel  
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according  
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to  
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other  
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel  
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your  
system on page 27.  
5
Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.  
Make sure that DVD/LD is showing in the receiver’s  
display, indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it  
isn’t, press DVD/LD on the remote control to set the  
receiver to the DVD input.  
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a  
source on page 9, there are several other sound options  
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 27  
for more on this.  
Listening to Surround Sound  
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible  
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,  
you should have your system hooked up for surround  
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply  
leave the receiver in the default settings.  
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu on page 34 for more setup options.  
• Be sure to complete all connections before  
connecting this unit to an AC power source.  
Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (MCACC)  
1
Connect your TV and DVD player.  
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic  
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account  
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for  
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set  
up the microphone provided with your system, the  
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones  
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your  
particular room.  
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 12 to do  
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a  
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.  
2
Connect your speakers and place them for optimal  
surround sound.  
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your  
speaker system on page 17.  
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the  
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best  
surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on  
page 18 for more on this.  
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a  
source on page 9.  
Important  
Center (C)  
Front  
Right (R)  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Front  
Left (L)  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
Subwoofer (SW)  
Surround  
Right (SR)  
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup the  
headphones should be disconnected.  
Surround  
Back  
Right (SBR)  
Listening  
position  
Caution  
Surround  
Left (SL)  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
Surround  
Back Left (SBL)  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
7
Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
speaker configuration in the OSD.  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TOP MENU ì  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
5
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
it’s doing this.  
TV CONTROL  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
• With error messages (such as Ambient Noise or  
Microphone Check) select RETRY after checking for  
ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup below) and verifying the mic  
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem,  
you can simply select OK and continue.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
1
2
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
1.Auto MCACC  
Check!  
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your  
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make  
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and  
the microphone.  
…
(2/9)  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
YES  
YES  
YES  
Yx2  
YES  
]
]
]
]
]
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
Center  
Surround  
SB  
[
[
[
OK  
]
]
]
Speaker YES/NO  
SUB W.  
[
OK  
]
MULTI  
–
ROOM  
&
(TUNE +)  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SELECT PROCESSING  
STEREO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
PHONES  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
(ST –)  
ENTER  
(ST +)  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
(TUNE –)  
6
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side  
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t  
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker  
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the  
power and check the speaker connections. If there  
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use ꢀ/ꢁ  
to select the speaker and ꢂ/ꢃ to change the setting  
(and number for surround back) and continue.  
3
Press RECEIVER on the remote, then press SETUP 1  
.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit  
2
the current menu. Press SETUP at any time to cancel.  
4
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu  
then press ENTER  
.
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Surr Back System  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
[
Normal (SB)  
]
]
Data Save to  
[M1. MEMORY  
1
Setting Start?  
ENTER:Next  
[OK]  
7.Other Setup  
[Option]  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 2 to 6 minutes.  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
3
5
Make sure ‘Normal (SB)’ is selected, select an  
9
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! PressRETURN  
4
7
MCACC preset then select OK.  
to go back to the System Setup menu.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
6
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re  
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to  
a comfortable volume level.  
8
System Setup menu (starting on page 34).  
Note  
1 You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod or XM Radio input source is selected (in either the main or sub room).  
2 If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
3 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker  
setting on page 36 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 6.  
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Option and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting.  
4 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can  
rename it later in Data Management on page 42).  
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
6 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound above indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.  
7 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 34 for more on this.  
8 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 5 inches (12 cm) will end up with different  
size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 43.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and  
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
4
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup  
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto  
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the  
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is  
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.  
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check  
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,  
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch  
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions  
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.  
Better sound using Phase Control  
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase  
correction measures to make sure your sound source  
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing  
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound (see  
illustration below).  
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of  
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,  
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.  
P
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
H
A
S
E
Playing a source  
?
C
O
N
T
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such  
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.  
O
F
Sound  
source  
TV CONTROL  
F
Subwoofer  
INPUT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
SELECT  
REC  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
P
H
A
S
MPX  
REC STOP MEMORY  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
E
DISP  
CH  
PHOTO  
C
O
N
T
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
Sound  
source  
O
N
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
Subwoofer  
DVR1  
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.  
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound  
Start by switching on the playback component (for  
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you  
have one), then the receiver (press ꢁ RECEIVER).  
4
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an  
optimal sound image at your listening position. The  
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase  
Control switched on for all sound sources.  
1
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
2
Select the input source you want to play.  
You can use the input source buttons on the remote  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
2
SELECTOR dial.  
3
Press S. DIRECT  
(
STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO  
•
Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase  
3
correction.  
SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.  
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound  
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are  
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the  
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.  
• See also Listening to your system on page 27 for  
information on different ways of listening to sources.  
Note  
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver. (For example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make sure that  
the VIDEO 1 input is now selected.)  
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 30).  
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS  
and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.  
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to  
a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 27 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.  
4 Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are 'in phase', they crest and trough together, re-  
sulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram  
above) then the sound will be 'out of phase' and an unreliable sound image will be produced.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
CChaoptnern3 ecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the  
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.  
Rear panel  
This illustration shows the VSX-84TXSi, however connections for the 82TXS are the same except where noted.  
11  
MULTI-ROOM  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
P
PRE OUT  
L
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
/
REC SEL  
1
7
5
FRONT  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
14  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
17  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
CENTER  
L
OUT2  
SUB W.  
12  
9
CD  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
IN  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
SUR-  
12 V TRIGGER  
2
3
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
AC OUTLET  
DVD/  
LD  
6
8
2
21  
13  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
1
SAT  
IN  
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
R
ROUND  
BACK  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
9
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
(
)
Single  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
R
L
)
VCR 1  
OUT  
Y
(
)
I
SWITCHED 100 W 0.8A MAX  
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
TV  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
10  
)
IN  
R
3
IN  
L
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
F
FL  
o
SPEAKERS  
20  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PB  
PR  
15  
18  
IN  
SURROUND BACK /  
(
)
CD-R  
B
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
(
L
)
Single  
R
L
R
L
R
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
19  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
L
L
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
IN  
R
4
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
XM  
16  
IN  
SELECTABLE  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
6
HDMI connectors (x4) (VSX-82TXS) (x5) (VSX-84TXSi)  
Caution  
Multiple inputs and one output for high-quality audio/  
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.  
ꢄ Connecting using HDMI on page 50.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
7
Remote inputs (multi-room and source)  
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor  
for use in a multi-room setup, for example.  
ꢄ Connecting an IR receiver on page 59.  
1
Optical digital audio output(s)  
Use the OUT1 and (VSX-84TXSi only) OUT2 jack for  
recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.  
ꢄ Connecting digital audio sources on page 15.  
8
12V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)  
The OUT1 jack is also used for multi-room connections.  
Use to switch components in your system on and off  
according to the input function of the receiver.  
ꢄ Switching components on and off using the 12 volt  
trigger on page 60.  
ꢄ Multi-room listening on page 57.  
2
USB audio input (VSX-84TXSi only)  
Use to connect your PC as an audio source.  
ꢄ Using the USB interface on page 54.  
9
Multi-room and source outputs  
Use to connect a second amplifier in a separate room.  
ꢄ Multi-room listening on page 57.  
3
Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs (x6)  
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/  
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.  
10 Component video connections (x4)  
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has  
component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use  
the output for connection to a monitor or TV.  
ꢄ Using the component video jacks on page 14.  
ꢄ See also The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign  
the inputs.  
4
XM Radio input  
ꢄ See Using XM Radio on page 48.  
11 AM and FM antenna terminals  
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio  
broadcasts.  
5
S-400 i.LINK connectors (x2) (VSX-84TXSi only)  
Use to connect other i.LINK audio devices for high-  
resolution, multichannel digital audio input/output.  
ꢄ Using the i.LINK interface on page 51.  
ꢄ Connecting antennas on page 19.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
12 Composite and S-video monitor outputs  
Use to connect monitors and TVs.  
ꢄ Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 12.  
When making cable connections  
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the  
top of the receiver.  
13 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)  
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD  
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks  
1
for composite video, S-video and stereo analog audio.  
ꢄ Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video  
sources on page 13.  
14 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)  
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,  
tape decks, turntables, etc.  
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when  
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter  
protecting the optical socket.  
ꢄ Connecting analog audio sources on page 16.  
15 Multichannel analog audio inputs  
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with  
multichannel analog outputs.  
ꢄ Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on  
page 54.  
16 Control input/output  
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable  
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.  
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you  
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote  
sensor.  
ꢄ Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s  
sensor on page 76.  
About the video converter  
The video converter ensures that all video sources are  
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.  
The only exception is HDMI and high-definition  
17 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs  
Use to connect separate amplifiers for center, surround,  
surround back and subwoofer channels.  
ꢄConnecting additional amplifiers on page 57 (see also  
Installing your speaker system on page 17 for powered  
subwoofer connection).  
component video: since these resolutions cannot be  
downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the  
receiver’s HDMI/component video outputs when  
2
connecting these video sources.  
18 iPod input terminal  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video  
source.  
If several video components are assigned to the same  
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 63),  
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-video,  
then composite (in that order).  
ꢄ Connecting an iPod on page 47.  
19 RS-232C connector  
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when  
using Advanced MCACC.  
ꢄ Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on  
page 62.  
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends  
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the AV  
options on page 66) OFF.  
20 Speaker terminals  
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround  
and surround back speakers.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology  
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
ꢄ Installing your speaker system on page 17.  
21 Switched AC power outlet (100 W / 0.8 A max.)  
Use to power another component in the system. Power to  
the outlet switches on and off with the receiver.  
ꢄ AC outlet on page 20.  
Note  
1 You must assign the input source to the S-video input to which you’ve connected your video component (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
2 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some  
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the AV  
options on page 66) OFF.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
component video jacks on page 14 if your TV and/or DVD  
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD  
player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 54.  
Connecting your TV and DVD player  
1
Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video  
input on your TV.  
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to  
the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use  
an S-video cable to connect to the S-video jack.  
TV  
2
Connect a composite or S-video output on your DVD  
player to the DVD/LD VIDEO or DVD/LD S-VIDEO input.  
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video  
cable.  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
IN  
IN  
1
1
3
Connect a coaxial-type digital audio output on  
your DVD player to the DIGITAL 1 (DVD/LD) input.  
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.  
4
Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
player to the DVD/LD AUDIO inputs.  
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
SOURCE  
/
REC SEL  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
BAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,  
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting  
the multichannel analog inputs on page 54.  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
APE  
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
2
)
/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
)
IN  
R
3
IN  
2
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
F
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(
)
CD-R  
1
4
SUB W.  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
IN  
SURR  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
XM  
OUT  
CONTROL  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-84TXSi  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
DIGITAL OUT  
ANALOG OUT  
3
2
4
DVD player  
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together  
with a TV and DVD player, with S-video or composite  
video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may  
offer alternative connections. See also Using the  
Note  
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set  
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver  
or other set-top box  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR  
and other video sources  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV  
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.  
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and  
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video  
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.  
VSX-84TXSi  
VSX-84TXSi  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
IN1  
IN  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
AUDIO  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
OUT2  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
CD  
IN  
IN1  
IN  
IN2  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
S400  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
IN2  
S400  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
OUT  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
2
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
1
SAT  
IN  
(
)
DVD/  
LD  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
&
1
2
TV  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
(
)
IN2  
IN3  
OUT  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
&
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
TV  
IN  
IN  
Y
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
MONITOR  
OUT  
SAT  
IN  
2
IN  
)
(
TV  
IN  
R
ZONE2  
)
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
3
IN  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
2
)
VCR 1  
(
DVR/  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(
)
DVD/LD  
)
IN  
IN  
1
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
SAT  
IN  
FR  
F
Y
IN  
R
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
3
IN  
4
IN  
P
B
PB  
L
(
DVR/  
(
)
CD-R  
)
VCR 2  
ABLE  
FR  
FL  
1
4
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
SUB W.  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
(CD-R)  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
P
R
P
R
OUT  
CENTER  
IN  
4
SUB W.  
SUR-  
DVR/  
ROUND  
ASSIGNA-  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
L
IN  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
SUR-  
DVR/  
2
CD  
(
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
R
R
(
)
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
OUT  
P
B
PB  
R
R
L
L
(
)
DVR/  
IN  
SURR  
VCR 2  
OUT  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
PR  
IN  
XM  
DVR/  
IN  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
PR  
3
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
MULTI CH  
IN  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
AV OUT  
S-VIDEO  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
AV OUT  
AV IN  
3
1
2
STB  
Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top box  
DVR, VCR, etc.  
Connect the audio/video outputs of the video  
player/recorder to the DVR/VCR1 AUDIO and VIDEO  
inputs.  
1
to the SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.  
1
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a  
1
video or S-video cable.  
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio  
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video  
connection.  
2
2
Connect an optical-type digital audio output from  
4
3
your set-top box to the DIGITAL 1 (SAT) input.  
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 IN inputs.  
2
If the device can record, connect the DVR/VCR1  
AUDIO and VIDEO outputs to the recorder’s audio/  
video inputs.  
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio  
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video  
connection.  
Note  
1 See The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign the S-VIDEO 2 input to the SAT input function if you make this connection.  
2 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
3 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.  
4 See The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign the S-VIDEO 2 input to the DVR/VCR1 input function if you make this connection.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 outputs.  
1
Connect the component video outputs of your  
source to a set of ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO  
inputs.  
Connect using a three-way component video cable.  
3
If the device can output digital audio, connect an  
1
optical-type digital audio output from the recorder to  
the DIGITAL 2 (DVR/VCR1) input.  
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which  
component video inputs you use for which source.  
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the  
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu  
on page 63.  
2
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• For a second recorder, use the DIGITAL 3 (DVR/  
VCR2) inputs.  
2
Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to the  
Using the component video jacks  
component video inputs on your TV or monitor.  
Use a three-way component video cable.  
Component video should give superior picture quality  
when compared to composite or S-video. You can also  
take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source  
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable,  
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your  
TV and source component to check whether they are  
compatible with progressive-scan video.  
VSX-84TXSi  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
3  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
R
L
VC
ASSIG
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PB  
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
PR  
OUT  
I
SUR-  
DVR/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
LD  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
L
L
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
IN  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
P
R
P
R
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
XM  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
3
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Y
P
B
R
P
2
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
TV  
Y
P
B
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
1
DVD player  
Note  
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).  
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.  
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
1
1
Connect an optical-type digital audio output on  
your digital component to the DIGITAL 4 (CD-R) input.  
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
Connecting digital audio sources  
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,  
allowing you to connect digital audio components for  
playback and for making digital recordings.  
2
For recording equipment, connect one of the  
optical-type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the  
recorder.  
Most digital components also have analog connections.  
See Connecting analog audio sources on the following  
page if you want to connect these too.  
Use an optical cable to connect to the DIGITAL OUT1 or  
(VSX-84TXSi only) OUT2 (OUT1 is shown in the  
2
illustration).  
VSX-84TXSi  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
AIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
About the WMA9 Pro decoder  
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
®
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
This unit has an on-board Windows Media Audio 9  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
3
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or  
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9  
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD  
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro  
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital  
output.  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
DVR/  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
)
TV  
IN  
R
3
IN  
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(
)
CD-R  
1
4
SUB W.  
CENT  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
LD  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
IN  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI C  
IN  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
1
2
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL IN  
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.  
Note  
1 • If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up  
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
2 • You must switch ROOM 3 ON in Using the multi-room controls on page 59 to hear audio from the DIGITAL OUT1.  
• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.  
3 • Microsoft, Windows Media®, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
2
Turntables only: Connect the stereo audio outputs to  
the PHONO inputs.  
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the  
ground terminal on this receiver.  
Connecting analog audio sources  
This receiver features three stereo audio-only inputs. Two  
of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with  
audio recorders.  
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a  
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs  
instead.  
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated  
turntable input which should not be used for any other  
type of component. This input also has a grounding  
terminal that most turntables require.  
Connecting a component to the front  
panel inputs  
2
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack  
(VIDEO), an S-Video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio  
inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input  
(DIGITAL). You can use these connections for any kind of  
audio/video component, but they are especially  
Turntable  
convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders,  
video games and portable audio/video equipment.  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
VSX-84TXSi  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
PHONES  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
R
FRONT  
ꢀ
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
SETUP  
RETURN  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
CENTER  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
OUT  
SUR-  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
TV  
IN  
(
)
Single  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
N
N
1
SAT  
IN  
)
TV  
IN  
R
L
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
A
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
FRONT  
CE  
R
L
SU
OUT  
SUR
DVR/  
ROU
VCR 1  
IN  
R
R
L
L
DIGITAL OUT  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
OUT  
TV game, video camera, etc.  
DVR/  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT (remote) or  
the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select  
VIDEO/GAME 2.  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
1
OUT  
PLAY  
IN  
REC  
R
L
AUDIO IN/OUT  
Tape deck, etc.  
Connect the analog audio outputs of the source  
1
component to one of the AUDIO inputs.  
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.  
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,  
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the  
analog audio inputs on the recorder.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Installing your speaker system  
03  
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound  
capabilities connect front, center, surround and  
main surround speakers should always be connected as  
a pair, but you can connect just one surround back  
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left  
surround back terminal). You can use speakers with a  
nominal impedance between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see  
Switching the speaker impedance on page 68 if you plan  
to use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).  
surround back speakers, as well as a subwoofer.  
Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer  
speakers—no subwoofer or no center speaker, or even  
no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front  
left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your  
Front  
right  
Front  
left  
Subwoofer  
Center  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
R
FRONT  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
CENTER  
OUT2  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
SUR-  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
AC OUTLET  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
1
SAT  
IN  
ROUND  
BACK  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
(
)
Single  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
R
L
)
1
VCR  
1
OUT  
Y
(
)
IN  
Y
SWITCHED 100 W 0.8A MAX  
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
)
TV  
IN  
R
3
IN  
L
2
(
DVR/  
)
2
VCR  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
A
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
IN  
SURROUND BACK /  
(
)
CD-R  
B
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
(
L
)
Single  
R
L
R
L
R
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
L
L
L
L
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
IN  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
XM  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-84TXSi  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
back left  
Surround  
back right  
Connecting the speakers  
Caution  
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a  
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to  
match these up with the terminals on the speakers  
themselves.  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted  
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.  
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel  
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend  
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent  
possible interference, such as discoloration of the  
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have  
magnetically shielded speakers and notice  
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers  
farther away from the TV.  
Bare wire connections  
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is  
properly prepared with about 3/8 in. (10 mm) of insulator  
stripped from each wire, and the exposed wire strands  
twisted together (fig. A).  
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns  
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire  
(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal  
until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).  
• If you're using a center speaker, place the front  
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a  
narrower angle.  
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so  
that the sound of the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker  
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of  
the front left and right speakers.  
3/8 in. (10mm)  
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening  
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.  
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.  
Banana plug connections  
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana  
plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut then plug the  
banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.  
• Surround and surround back speakers should be  
positioned a foot-and-a-half to three feet (60 cm to 90  
cm) higher than your ears and titled slight downward.  
Make sure the speakers don't face each other. For  
DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly  
behind the listener than for home theater playback.  
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away  
from the listening position than the front and center  
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound  
effect.  
Important  
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install  
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers  
are installed securely to prevent accidents and  
improve sound quality.  
• Please refer to the manual that came with your  
speakers for details on how to connect the other end  
of the speaker cables to your speakers.  
• Other connections on page 47 provides greater detail  
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker  
system B (page 55), bi-amping (page 56) and bi-  
wiring (page 56).  
Front  
left  
Front  
right  
Center  
Subwoofer  
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the  
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer  
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your  
subwoofer.  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
Placing the speakers  
Listening position  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect  
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines  
should help you to get the best sound from your system.  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the  
other speakers should be at about ear-level when  
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the  
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very  
high on a wall is not recommended.  
Single surround back speaker  
Caution  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.  
This not only improves sound quality, but also  
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from  
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers  
6 ft. to 9 ft. apart, at equal distance from the TV.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
The diagrams below show suggested surround and  
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.  
A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or  
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation  
with two surround back speakers connected.  
Connecting antennas  
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to  
AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is  
poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound  
quality—see Connecting external antennas below.  
90~120  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SR  
SL  
VSX-84TXSi  
0~60  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
&
SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
R
FRONT  
SL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
S400  
(AUDIO)  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
CENTER  
SBL  
SBR  
OUT2  
SUB W.  
SBL SBR  
SB  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
SUR-  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
fig. A  
fig. B  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
2
IN  
IN  
(ZONE2)  
(Single)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(DVR/  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
VCR 1)  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
IN  
R
• If you have two surround back speakers THX  
recommends placing them together and the same  
distance from your listening position (see below).  
3
IN  
L
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
A
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
(CD-R)  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
IN  
FRONT  
CENT  
R
L
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR  
1
3
2
IN  
IN  
LD)  
IN  
Y
Y
2
IN  
(CD)  
R
R
L
L
OUT  
DVR/  
PB  
PB  
IN  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR  
2
THX speaker system setup  
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the  
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
XM  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating  
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the  
listener.  
AM loop antenna  
1 Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.  
L
C
R
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
SL  
SR  
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).  
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).  
Surround  
Surround  
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C).  
Before fixing, make sure that the reception is  
satisfactory.  
SBL  
SBR  
Surround back  
• If you have two surround back speakers THX  
recommends placing them together and the same  
distance from your listening position for the following  
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX  
2
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna  
wires.  
3
Press the AM LOOP antenna terminal tabs to open  
and insert one wire into each terminal.  
MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE.  
See also THX Audio Setting on page 46 to make the  
settings that will give you the best sound experience  
when using the Home THX modes (on page 28).  
4
Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.  
5
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in  
the direction giving the best reception.  
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other  
electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact  
with metal objects.  
Important  
• The signal ground (ꢂ) is designed to reduce noise  
that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not  
an electrical safety ground.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
FM wire antenna  
Plugging in the receiver  
•
Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL  
Only plug in after you have connected all your  
75 Ω in the same way as the AM antenna.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a  
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.  
components to this receiver, including the speakers.  
•
Plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC power  
outlet.  
Connecting external antennas  
To improve FM reception connect an external FM  
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.  
Caution  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull  
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the  
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could  
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place  
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the  
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never  
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The  
power cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can  
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the  
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent  
service company for a replacement.  
75 Ω coaxial cable  
ANTENNA  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the  
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular  
use, e.g., when on vacation.  
To improve AM reception, connect a 15 ft. to 18 ft. length  
of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without  
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.  
• Make sure the blue ꢁ STANDBY/ON light has gone  
out before unplugging.  
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally  
outdoors.  
Outdoor antenna  
AC outlet  
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by  
the receiver's power switch. Total electrical power  
consumption of connected equipment should not exceed  
100 W (0.8 A).  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
ANTENNA  
15 ft. to 18 ft.  
Caution  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
• Do not connect a TV set, monitor, heater, or similar  
appliance to this unit's AC outlet.  
• Do not connect appliances with high power  
consumption to the AC outlet in order to avoid  
overheating and fire risk. This can also cause the  
receiver to malfunction.  
• Since a subwoofer or power amplifier can exceed the  
100 W maximum when playing sources at a high  
volume, this type of equipment should not be  
connected to the AC outlet.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
Chapter 4:  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
Illustration shows the VSX-84TXSi front panel  
1
2
3
4 5  
6 7  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-84TXSi  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢁ
PHASE  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
MCACC  
POSITION  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT  
HOME  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
14  
15  
13  
16 17 18  
19 20  
21 22  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
ENTER  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
23  
24  
26  
25  
27  
28  
1
INPUT SELECTOR dial  
5
Remote sensor  
Use to select an input source.  
Receives the signals from the remote control (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 22).  
2
ꢁ STANDBY/ON  
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power  
indicator lights when the receiver is on.  
6
HDMI indicator  
Blinks when connecting an HDMI-equipped component;  
lights when the component is connected (page 50).  
3
PHASE CONTROL – Press to switch on/off phase  
correction (page 9).  
7
Digital Precision Processing indicator  
Lights to indicate digital processing (for example, it  
disappears when Pure Direct (page 29) is on, or when  
listening through the multichannel analog inputs).  
MCACC POSITION – Press to switch between  
MCACC presets (page 29).  
AUTO SURR / STREAM DIRECT – Press to select  
Auto Surround (page 27) or Stream Direct (page 29)  
listening.  
8
Character display  
See Display on page 23.  
4
PHASE CONTROL indicator  
Lights when Phase Control is switched on (page 9).  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
9
MCACC indicator  
20 SIGNAL SELECT  
Lights when one of the MCACC presets (page 29) is  
selected.  
Use to select an input signal (page 30).  
21 SBch PROCESSING  
10 i.LINK indicator (VSX-84TXSi only)  
Lights when an i.LINK-Audio-equipped component is  
selected (page 51).  
Selects the surround back channel mode (page 30) or  
virtual surround back mode (page 30).  
22 STEREO  
Switches to stereo playback (page 29).  
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER indicator (VSX-82TXS only)  
Lights when Resolution is set to a setting other than  
PURE (for example, when the video input signal is  
upscaled) (page 66).  
23 PHONES jack  
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are  
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.  
11 Listening mode buttons  
24 SETUP  
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening  
mode (page 28).  
Press to access the System Setup menu (see page 34).  
25 ꢀꢁꢂꢃ (TUNE/ST +/–) /ENTER  
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard  
decoding and to switch between the various 2Pro  
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 27).  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 34). Use the TUNE +/– buttons  
to find radio frequencies and use ST +/– to find preset  
stations (page 33).  
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between  
the various surround modes (page 28).  
26 RETURN  
12 MASTER VOLUME dial  
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.  
13 Front panel controls  
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the  
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.  
27 MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone.  
28 VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT  
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on  
page 16.  
ꢀ ST  
A
N
D
B
Y
/
O
N
Operating range of remote control unit  
The remote control may not work properly if:  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the receiver's remote sensor.  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
14 SPEAKERS  
Use to change the speaker system (page 55).  
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting  
infrared rays.  
15 AV PARAMETER  
Use to access the AV options (page 66).  
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another  
infrared remote control unit.  
16 TUNER EDIT  
Use with ꢀ/ꢁto memorize and name stations for recall  
(page 33).  
ꢀ STA  
N
D
B
17 BAND  
Y/O  
N
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 32).  
A
U
D
IO  
30  
30  
/V  
ID  
EO  
M
U
L
T
I
-
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
R
E
C
E
IV  
E
R
18 MULTI ROOM & SOURCE / REC SEL controls  
If you’ve made multi-room connections (see Multi-room  
listening on page 57) use these controls to control the  
sub room from the main room (see Using the multi-room  
controls on page 59).  
7m (23 ft.)  
You will also need to use the REC SEL controls when  
recording a source (see Making an audio or a video  
recording on page 67).  
19 VIDEO SELECT  
Press repeatedly to select the video source (page 68).  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
Display  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
SIGNAL  
AUTO  
VIDEO CONV. V.SB DNR MIDNIGHT TUNED  
MULTI-ROOM DIALOGUE LOUDNESS STEREO  
OVER ATT Hi-bit/sampling TONE MONO  
2DIGITAL DTS  
WMA9 Pro 96/24  
DSD PCM  
L
C
S
R
SL  
SR  
dB  
USB XM  
SR+  
HDMI  
SBL SB SBR  
LFE  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
STREAM DIRECT  
CD  
CD-R PHONO  
TUNER MULTI IN DVD  
iPod TV  
SAT VIDEO HDMI  
[
]
[
] [ ] [  
3
]
DVR  
1
2
4
Neo : 6  
2
PRO LOGIC  
THX ADV.SURROUND  
STEREO  
AB  
STANDARD  
SLEEP  
SP  
12 13  
14  
15 16  
17  
18  
1
SIGNAL indicators  
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is  
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.  
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input  
signal automatically (page 30).  
being received in auto stereo mode.  
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using  
the MPX button.  
2
Program format indicators  
10 Master volume level  
Shows the overall volume level. –80dB indicates the  
minimum level, and +12dB indicates the maximum level.  
These change according to which channels are active in  
digital sources.  
L – Left front channel  
C – Center channel  
R – Right front channel  
SL – Left surround channel  
S – Surround channel (mono)  
SR – Right surround channel  
11 Input source indicators  
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.  
12 STREAM DIRECT  
Lights when Direct / Pure Direct is selected (page 29).  
SBL – Left surround back channel  
SB – Surround back channel (mono)  
SBR – Right surround back channel  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when  
an LFE signal is being input)  
13 Speaker indicators  
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B  
(page 55).  
14 Listening mode indicators  
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is  
selected.  
3
Digital format indicators  
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format  
is detected (DSDꢃPCM lights during DSD (Digital  
Stream Direct) to PCM conversion with SACDs).  
ADV. SURROUND – Lights when one of the  
Advanced Surround modes has been selected.  
4
OVER ATT  
/
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched  
on (see Listening in stereo on page 29).  
OVER lights to indicate that the level of an analog source  
is too high. ATT lights when you use the attenuator  
(ANALOG ATT) to reduce it.  
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard  
Surround modes is switched on (see Listening in  
surround sound on page 27).  
5
MULTI-ROOM  
Lights when the multi-room feature is active (page 57).  
15 SLEEP  
6
VIDEO CONV.  
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 68).  
Lights when digital video conversion is switched on (see  
Setting the AV options on page 66).  
16 Matrix decoding format indicators  
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2Pro  
Logic II / 2Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 27).  
7
V.SB  
Lights during Virtual surround back processing  
(page 30).  
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver  
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing  
(page 27).  
8
Sound processing indicators  
Light according to the active AV parameter(s) (page 66).  
17 Character display  
Displays various system information.  
9
TUNER indicators  
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.  
18 SR+  
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 61).  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
04  
3
Input source buttons  
Press to select control of other components (see  
Controlling the rest of your system on page 71).  
4
Number buttons and other receiver/component  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
controls  
12  
13  
1
2
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio  
frequency (page 32) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.  
DISC (ENTER) can be used to enter commands for TV or  
DTV, and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.  
Press RECEIVER first to access:  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 1  
DVD  
SAT  
TV CONT  
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and  
select the amount of time before sleep (page 68).  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
3
4
DVR1  
14  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
VIDEO SEL – Press repeatedly to select the video  
source (page 68).  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
ANALOG ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an  
analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 68).  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 61).  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
S. RETRIEVER – Press to restore CD quality sound to  
compressed audio sources (page 31).  
TUNE  
5
6
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 68).  
ꢀ
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
Press TUNER first to access:  
TV CONTROL  
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio  
station directly using the number buttons (page 32).  
INPUT  
TV CH  
TV VOL  
VOL  
SELECT  
15  
16  
7
8
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)  
of radio station presets (page 33).  
REC  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
MPX  
REC STOP MEMORY  
5
Tuner/component control buttons/SETUP  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
These button controls can be accessed after you have  
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,  
DVR1, SAT etc.). The BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls  
are explained on page 32 and page 33. Press RECEIVER  
first to access the following controls:  
DISP  
CH  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
9
10  
17  
18  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
11  
AV PARAMETER – Use to access the AV options  
(page 66).  
RECEIVER  
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu  
(page 34).  
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according  
to component control using the following system (press  
the corresponding input source button to access):  
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,  
then use ꢂ/ꢃ to adjust the level (page 45).  
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current  
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu  
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).  
• Green – Receiver controls (see below)  
• Red – DVD controls (page 75)  
• Blue – Tuner/XM Radio controls (page 32)  
• Yellow – iPod controls (page 47)  
• White – Other controls (page 75)  
6
ꢂꢃꢁꢀ (TUNE/ST) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 34) and the AV options  
(page 66). Also used to control DVD menus/options and  
for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the TUNE  
ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST ꢂ/ꢃ  
to find preset stations (page 33).  
1
RECEIVER  
ꢁ
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
2
INPUT SELECT  
Use to select the input source (use SHIFT for INPUT  
SELECT ).  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
7
TV CONTROL buttons  
DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 73.  
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to  
the TV CONT button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook  
up to this system assign it to the TV CONT input source  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV  
CONT button (see page 71 for more on this).  
RENAME – See Renaming input source names on  
page 73.  
ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button  
settings on page 72.  
RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on  
page 72.  
TVꢁ – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.  
TV VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.  
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the TV input signal.  
TV CH +/– – Use to select channels.  
READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 72.  
14 RECEIVER  
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to  
select the green commands above the number buttons  
(ANALOG ATT, etc). Also use this button to set up  
surround sound (page 7, page 34). With SHIFT, this  
selects the multi-room control (page 57), shown in the  
display as RCV/RM2, RCV/RM3.  
8
Component control buttons  
The main buttons (ꢃ, ꢄ, etc.) are used to control a  
component after you have selected it using the input  
source buttons.  
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after  
you have selected the corresponding input source button  
(for example DVD, DVR1, TV or SAT (when connected to  
a DTV)). The following controls can be accessed when  
listening to the built-in tuner:  
15 VOL +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
16 MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception  
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching  
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 32).  
17 Receiver controls  
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 30).  
DISP – Switches between named station presets and  
radio frequencies (page 33).  
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back  
channel mode (page 30).  
9
STATUS  
STEREO – Switches between direct and stereo  
playback. Direct playback bypasses the tone controls  
and any other signal processing for the most  
accurate reproduction of a source (page 29).  
Press to check selected receiver settings (page 69).  
10 MULTIOPE  
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 73).  
11 SHIFT  
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode  
Press to access the controls outlined in white boxes (for  
(page 28).  
example, INPUT SELECT  
selected input source in the remote control LCD.  
), or to display the currently  
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to  
switch between the various Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6  
options (page 27).  
12 SOURCEꢁ  
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the  
receiver (see page 71 for more on this).  
ADV.SURR – Use to switch between the various  
surround modes (page 28).  
13 Character display (LCD)  
18 PHASE – Press to switch on/off phase correction  
This display shows information when transmitting  
control signals.  
(page 9).  
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets  
(page 29).  
The following commands are shown when you’re setting  
the remote to control other components (see Controlling  
the rest of your system on page 71):  
S.DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround (page 27)  
or Stream Direct (page 29) listening.  
SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you  
choose the options below.  
PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on  
page 71.  
LEARNING – See Programming signals from other  
remote controls on page 71.  
MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on  
page 73.  
SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on  
page 73.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
6
DISP  
Switches between named station presets and radio  
frequencies (page 33).  
Sub remote control unit  
VSX-84TXSi only  
7
Component control buttons  
The second remote control supplied with this receiver is  
for use with the multi-room listening feature, as  
explained on page 57. Note that you must connect a  
separate IR receiver as explained in Connecting an IR  
receiver on page 59 for remote control in your sub  
room(s).  
These are used to control a component after you have  
selected it using the input source buttons.  
8
MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
9
Multi-room select  
Selects the room you want to control using this remote.  
RECEIVER  
HDMI  
TV  
i.LINK  
SAT  
10 T.EDIT  
1
2
MAIN  
Use with ꢂ/ꢃ to memorize and name stations for  
recall (page 33).  
DVD  
9
ROOM2  
ROOM3  
DVR1  
VIDEO2  
MULTI IN  
DVR2  
CD  
VIDEO1  
CD-R  
USB  
XM  
Selects the repeat mode of an iPod (page 47).  
PHONO  
iPod  
TUNER  
11 RETURN  
TOPMENU  
TUNE  
T.EDIT  
ST  
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.  
3
4
10  
BAND  
ST  
ENTER  
ꢀ
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 32).  
5
11  
12  
TUNE  
BAND  
12 CLASS  
DISP  
CLASS  
6
7
PHOTO  
Switches between the three banks (classes) of radio  
station presets (page 33).  
PHOTO  
Press to view iPod photos and video content (page 48)  
.
MUTE  
VOLUME  
13 VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
13  
8
RECEIVER  
1
RECEIVER  
ꢁ
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
2
Input source buttons  
Press to select control of other components (see  
Controlling the rest of your system on page 71).  
3
TOP MENU  
Displays the top menu of an iPod and XM Radio.  
4
ꢂꢃꢁꢀ (TUNE/ST) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 34) and the AV options  
(page 66). Also used to control iPod and XM Radio  
menus. Use the TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to find radio  
frequencies and use ST ꢂ/ꢃ to find preset stations  
(page 33).  
5
CATEGORY  
Selects XM Radio genre search (page 49).  
Selects the shuffle mode of an iPod (page 47).  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Chapter 5:  
Listening to your system  
Important  
Listening in surround sound  
• The listening modes and many features described in  
this section may not be available depending on the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
See Listening modes with different input signal  
formats on page 86 for more on this.  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in  
surround sound. However, the options available will  
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source  
you’re listening to.  
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using  
surround back channel processing on page 30.  
Auto playback  
Standard surround sound  
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this  
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option  
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically  
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects  
The following modes provide basic surround sound for  
3
stereo and multichannel sources.  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
1
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.  
PHOTO  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
RECEIVER  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
•
While listening to a source, press STANDARD  
RECEIVER  
(STANDARD SURROUND).  
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
•
While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT (AUTO  
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround  
encoded, the proper decoding format will  
SURR/STREAM DIRECT)2 for auto playback of a source.  
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before  
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the  
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see  
how the source is being processed.  
4
automatically be selected and shows in the display.  
With two channel sources, you can select from:  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to movie sources  
• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround  
feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD  
Surround on page 49 for more on this).  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
5
especially suited to music sources  
• 2Pro Logic IIx GAME– Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to video games  
• 2PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound  
from the surround speakers is mono)  
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to movie sources  
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited  
6
to music sources  
With multichannel sources, if you have connected  
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you  
can select (according to format):  
Note  
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound above  
for more on these decoding formats).  
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones or select the multichannel analog inputs.  
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 29.  
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.  
4 If surround back channel processing (page 30) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 36 is set to anything but Normal (SB)), 2Pro Logic IIx becomes 2Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).  
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension,  
and Panorama. See Setting the AV options on page 66 to adjust them.  
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the AV options on page 66).  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available  
when you’re using two surround back speakers)  
• THX Select2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above  
• THX MUSICMODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel  
playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel  
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure  
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital  
Surround EX)  
• THX GAMES MODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel  
playback from the output of a video game console  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety  
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced  
Surround modes are designed to be used with film  
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music  
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks  
to see which you like.  
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS-ES encoded sources  
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS encoded sources  
Using the Home THX modes  
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by  
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX  
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like  
what you hear in a cinema.  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
Different THX options will be available depending on the  
source and the setting for surround back channel  
processing (see Using surround back channel processing  
on page 30 for more on this).  
RECEIVER  
•
Press ADV.SURR  
(
ADVANCED SURROUND  
)
2
PHOTO  
repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
soundtracks  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
special effects  
RECEIVER  
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
1
• MUSICAL – Creates a concert hall-type sound for  
musicals  
•
Press THX  
(
HOME THX) to select a listening mode.  
With two channel sources, press THX  
(HOME THX  
)
repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the  
THX CINEMA mode (see Listening in surround sound  
above for an explanation of each process):  
• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
• 7-D THEATER – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
• CHAMBER – Creates a space with alot of reverb  
• JAZZ – Creates the sound of a small jazz club  
• ROCK – Creates a live concert sound for rock music  
• DANCE – Designed for music with lots of bass  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
• 2PRO LOGIC+THX  
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX  
• THX GAMES MODE  
With multichannel sources, press THX (HOME THX)  
repeatedly to select from:  
• 7ch STEREO – Allows you to hear stereo sources  
from all the speakers in your setup  
• THX CINEMA – Gives you cinema-quality sound from  
your home theatre system using all the speakers in  
your setup  
• ADV. VIR. SURR. – A virtual surround effect using  
just the subwoofer and/or the front speakers  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX – Especially suited to  
movie sources, this allows you to hear 7.1 channel  
playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• PhonesSurround – When listening through  
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall  
surround  
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
Note  
1 • If you only have one surround back speaker connected, 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX, THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES  
MODE are not available.  
• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected.  
2 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. For more on  
this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 30.  
• If you press ADV. SURR when the headphones are connected, the PhonesSurround mode will automatically be selected.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
1
While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT  
Tip  
(AUTO SURR STREAM DIRECT to select the mode  
/
)
you want.  
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is  
selected (except ADV. VIR. SURR.), the effect level  
can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in  
Setting the AV options on page 66.  
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel  
display to see how the source is being processed.  
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 27.  
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the  
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker  
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic  
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual  
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and  
hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources  
according to the number of channels in the signal.  
Listening in stereo  
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source  
through just the front left and right speakers (and  
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker  
settings). Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel sources  
are downmixed to stereo.  
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard  
1
PHOTO  
SBch  
without any digital processing. No sound is output  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
STEREO  
from the Second Zone in this mode.  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
Selecting MCACC presets  
RECEIVER  
• Default setting: MEMORY 1  
•
While listening to a source, pressSTEREO for stereo  
If you have calibrated your system for different listening  
positions , you can switch between settings to suit the  
2
playback.  
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting  
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a  
video game close to the TV).  
Using Stream Direct  
PHOTO  
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the  
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary  
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the  
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
with different input signal formats on page 88).  
PHOTO  
RECEIVER  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
•
While listening to a source, press MCACC  
(MCACC  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
POSITION).  
3
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets  
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on  
page 42 to check and manage your current settings.  
RECEIVER  
Note  
1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.  
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These pre-  
sets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 34, either of which you should  
have already completed.  
3 You can’t use these settings when MULTI CH IN is switched on, and they has no effect when headphones are connected.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Choosing the input signal  
05  
The table below indicates when you will hear the  
surround back channel when playing various kinds of  
sources. (ì=Sound plays through surround back  
speaker(s))  
You need to hook up a component to both analog and  
digital inputs on the receiver to select between input  
PHOTO  
1
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
signals.  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
•
Press SBch (SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle  
the surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
•
Press SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT) to select the  
input signal corresponding to the source component.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for  
example, a surround back channel will be generated  
for 5.1 encoded material)  
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver  
selects the first available signal in the following  
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,  
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
order: ; HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.  
• SBch OFF – Maximum 5.1 playback  
2
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode  
When you’re not using surround back speakers,  
•
– Selects an i.LINK signal (VSX-84TXSi only).  
3
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround  
back channel through your surround speakers. You can  
choose to listen to sources with no surround back  
channel information, or if the material sounds better in  
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally  
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect  
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output. The receiver  
selects the first available signal in the following  
order: ; HDMI; DIGITAL.  
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2DIGITAL lights with  
Dolby Digital decoding, DTS lights with DTS decoding,  
and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate decoding of a WMA9  
Pro signal.  
4
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual  
surround back channel. (ì=Virtual surround back  
channel is active)  
Using surround back channel processing  
•
Press SBch (SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle  
• Default setting: SBch ON  
the virtual surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby  
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use  
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded  
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back  
channel will be generated, but the material may sound  
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally  
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround  
back channel processing off).  
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used  
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)  
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is  
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for  
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
Note  
1 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 96 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz / 24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. With  
other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN, TUNER and iPod input functions are all fixed to ANALOG).  
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connec-  
tions (page 15) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.  
• Even when i.LINK is selected and the i.LINK indicator lights, you won’t hear any sound if the output settings of your i.LINK device are off.  
• The input signal for unassigned i.LINK-equipped components is fixed to . See Checking the i.LINK inputs on page 52.  
2 When the HDMI option in Setting the AV options on page 66 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.  
3 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.  
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.  
4 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode with headphones, or with the THX, STEREO or Stream Direct modes.  
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the Surr Back setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on  
page 43.  
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is  
switched off  
Standard / THX  
Stereo sources  
SBch  
Processing /  
Virtual SB  
mode  
Advanced  
surround  
Type of source  
Multichannel  
sources  
2Pro Logic II x  
2Pro Logic  
Neo:6  
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES encoded  
multichannel sources with 6.1ch surround  
ON  
AUTO  
ON  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Dolby Digital/DTS/WMA9 Pro encoded, DVD-  
Audio and SACD multichannel sources  
AUTO  
ON  
a
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM/WMA9 Pro encoded,  
DVD-Audio and SACD stereo sources  
ì
ì
ì
b
b
AUTO  
ON  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
a
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources  
ì
ì
ì
ì
b
AUTO  
ì
a. Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.  
b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.  
Using the Sound Retriever  
When audio data is removed during the WMA/MP3/  
MPEG-4 AAC compression process, sound quality often  
suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound  
Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that  
helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-  
channel audio by restoring sound pressure and  
smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
•
Press RECEIVER then press S. RETRIEVER (SOUND  
RETRIEVER) to switch the sound retriever on or off.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
Chapter 6:  
Using the tuner  
Tuning directly to a station  
Sometimes, you'll already know the frequency of the  
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply  
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on  
the remote control.  
Listening to the radio  
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and  
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the  
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a  
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can  
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving  
station presets on page 33 for more on how to do this.  
1
Press the TUNER button to select the tuner.  
2
Use the BAND button to change the band (FM or  
AM), if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
REC  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
+
10  
3
4
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).  
DISC  
MPX  
REC STOP MEMORY  
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TOP MENU ì  
TUNE  
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
ST  
ST  
DISP  
CH  
DTV MENU  
SETUP  
T.EDIT  
ì
PHOTO  
ENTER  
the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.  
RETURN  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
ꢀ
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
TV CONTROL  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
INPUT  
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS  
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
SELECT  
REC  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
1
2
Press the TUNER button to select the tuner.  
Use the BAND button to change the band (FM or  
AM), if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
3
Tune to a station.  
There are three ways to do this:  
Automatic tuning  
To search for stations in the currently selected band,  
press and hold TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ for about a second. The  
receiver will start searching for the next station,  
stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for  
other stations.  
Manual tuning  
To change the frequency one step at a time, press  
TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ.  
High speed tuning  
Press and hold TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ for high speed tuning.  
Release the button at the frequency you want.  
Improving FM stereo sound  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don't light when  
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press  
the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono  
reception mode. This should improve the sound quality  
and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
• The name is stored when ENTER is pressed after  
choosing the fourth character.  
Saving station presets  
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it's  
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for  
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.  
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This  
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three  
banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When  
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 32) is  
also stored.  
Tip  
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1-3 and  
input four spaces instead of a name.  
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press  
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display  
between name and frequency.  
Listening to station presets  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See  
Saving station presets above if you haven’t done this  
already.  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
MPX  
REC STOP MEMORY  
10  
DISC  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SELECT  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
DISP  
CH  
TUNE  
PHOTO  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
ì
ENTER  
SETUP  
RETURN  
ꢀ
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
TV CONTROL  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station  
DVR1  
RECEIVER  
REC  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
3
Press ST ꢂ/ꢃ to select the station preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the station preset.  
See Listening to the radio on page 32 for more on this.  
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).  
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking  
memory class.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes then  
press ST ꢂ/ꢃ to select the station preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a station  
preset.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the station.  
Naming station presets  
For easier identification, you can name your station  
presets.  
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.  
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.  
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).  
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking  
cursor at the first character position.  
3
Input the name you want.  
Choose from the following characters for a name up to  
four characters long.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜  
• Use the ST ꢂ/ꢃ buttons (remote) to select  
characters.  
• Press ENTER to confirm a character. If no character  
is input, a space is input.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Chapter 7:  
The System Setup menu  
• Surr Back System – Specify how you are using your  
surround back speakers (see Surround back speaker  
setting on page 36).  
Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu  
• Manual MCACC – Fine tune your speaker settings  
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
Manual MCACC setup on page 37).  
The following section shows you how to make detailed  
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for  
example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in  
separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune  
individual speaker system settings to your liking.  
• Data Management – Check your MCACC presets  
and manage them through copying, renaming or  
deleting (see Data Management on page 42).  
• Manual SP Setup – Specify the size, number,  
distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve  
connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 43).  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
INPUT  
DISC  
RECEIVER  
SELECT  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
• Input Setup – Specify what you’ve connected to the  
digital and component video inputs (see The Input  
Setup menu on page 63).  
ꢀ
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
TV CONTROL  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
• Other Setup – Make customized settings to reflect  
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup  
menu on page 64).  
DVR1  
REC  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
ANALOG  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
1
Use the ꢁ RECEIVER button to switch on.  
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,  
disconnect them.  
Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those  
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC) on page 7, you can customize your setup  
options below. You can calibrate your system differently  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
2
the SETUP button.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
3
for up to six different MCACC presets , which are useful  
if you have different listening positions depending on the  
type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa,  
or playing a video game close to the TV).  
4
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup  
menu.  
Important  
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved  
during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
5
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
7.Other Setup  
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three  
minutes of inactivity.  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 for a quick and  
effective automatic surround setup. See Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) below for a more detailed setup.  
Caution  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.  
2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC  
before pressing SETUP  
.
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod or XM Radio input source is selected (in either the main or sub room).  
3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 42.  
4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.  
5 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Option setup screen (step 3).  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
5
1
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
weighting is given to any one channel. Optionally,  
jack on the front panel.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with  
the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied  
to the front left and right channels), and OFF (only  
available when ALL is selected) allows you to save  
calibration settings (such as speaker distance and  
channel level) with no EQ or standing wave  
MULTI  
–
ROOM  
&
(TUNE +)  
ENTER  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
VIDEO  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
SELECT  
SELECT PROCESSING  
STEREO  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
PHONES  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
adjustment to your selected preset.  
• Multi-Point (only available when the Auto Mode  
above is Acoustic Cal EQ or Aco Cal EQ Pro.) – In  
addition to measurements at the listening position,  
you can use two more reference points for which test  
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is  
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a  
table or a chair.  
2
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu  
6
for several seating positions in your listening area.  
then press ENTER  
.
Place the microphone at the reference point  
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone  
placement will be at your main listening position:  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
1.Auto MCACC  
Surr Back System  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
[
Normal (SB)  
]
]
Data Save to  
[M1. MEMORY  
1
Setting Start?  
ENTER:Next  
[OK]  
2nd reference  
3rd reference  
7.Other Setup  
[Option]  
point  
point  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
1
2
1
3
Make sure ‘Normal (SB)’ is selected, select an  
2
MCACC preset then select OK.  
3
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select Option  
and set the following parameters:  
Main listening  
position  
1.Auto MCACC Option  
Auto Mode  
1. Auto MCACC Option  
1.Auto MCACC Option  
Auto Mode  
When you’re finished settings the options, press  
RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.  
(
Back  
)
[
ALL  
]
[
Aco Cal EQ Pro.  
]
Speaker settings  
will be updated.  
EQ Type  
:
FRONT ALIGN  
EQ Type  
Data Save to  
M2. MEMORY  
OFF  
Data Save to  
[ALL CH ADJUST]  
2
Multi-Point  
NO  
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
THX Speaker  
NO  
EQ Type  
:
If you are using THX  
speakers, select YES.  
[
–
–
.
–
–
–
]
• Make sure the microphone is connected.  
(
Next  
)
ꢀ: Return to Auto MCACC  
ꢀ
:
Return to Auto MCACC  
ꢀ
:
Return to Auto MCACC  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically  
detected every time you switch on the system. Make  
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.  
• Auto Mode – The default is ALL (recommended), but  
you can limit the system calibration to only one  
3
setting (to save time) if you want. The available  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 9 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
4
options are ALL, ALL (Keep SPsetting), Speaker  
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance,  
Acoustic Cal EQ, and Aco Cal EQ Pro.  
5
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting  
• THX Speaker (only available when the Auto Mode  
above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you  
are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL),  
otherwise leave it set to NO.  
test tones.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
it’s doing this.  
• EQ Type (only available when the Auto Mode above is  
Acoustic Cal EQ or Aco Cal EQ Pro.) – This  
determines how the frequency balance is adjusted.  
ALL CH ADJUST (default) is a ‘flat’ setting where all  
the speakers are set individually so no special  
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This  
may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
Note  
1 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker set-  
ting on page 36 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.  
2 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can  
rename it later in Data Management on page 42).  
3 The Aco Cal EQ Pro. measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 39 for more on this.  
4 The ALL (Keep SPsetting) option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 43) unchanged.  
5 If you selected ALL as your Auto Mode setting, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the FRONT ALIGN and/or OFF settings.  
6 Switch the Multi-Point setting OFF if you only use one listening position.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
• With error messages (such as Ambient Noise or  
Microphone Check) select RETRY after checking for  
ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup on page 9) and verifying the mic  
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem,  
you can simply select OK and continue.  
8
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! PressRETURN  
to go back to the System Setup menu.  
4a.MCACC Data Check  
1.Speaker Setting  
2.Channel Level  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Standing Wave  
5.Acoustic Cal EQ  
6
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
1
the OSD.  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
1.Auto MCACC  
Check!  
2
…
(2/9)  
System Setup menu (starting on page 34).  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
YES  
YES  
YES  
Yx2  
YES  
]
]
]
]
]
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
Center  
Surround  
SB  
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting  
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check  
screen:  
[
[
[
OK  
]
]
]
Speaker YES/NO  
SUB W.  
[
OK  
]
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers  
you’ve connected (see page 43 for more on this)  
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side  
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t  
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker  
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the  
power and check the speaker connections. If there  
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use ꢀ/ꢁ  
to select the speaker and ꢂ/ꢃ to change the setting  
(and number for surround back) and continue.  
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker  
system (see page 44 for more on this)  
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers  
from the listening position (see page 45 for more on  
3
this)  
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower  
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 38 for more on this)  
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency  
balance of your speaker system based on the  
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 39  
for more on this)  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each  
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back  
to the System Setup menu.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
Subwoofer Check  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
…
…
(6/9)  
Surround Analyzing  
Speaker System  
Channel Level  
[
[
[
OK  
OK  
]
]
]
Speaker Distance  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
Surround back speaker setting  
• Default setting: Normal (SB)  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 2–6 minutes.  
There are several ways you can use the surround back  
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a  
normal home theater setup where they are used for the  
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping  
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system  
in another room.  
• If you selected a Multi-Point setup (in step 3), you  
will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd  
reference points before finally placing it at your main  
listening position.  
Note  
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Auto Mode from the Auto MCACC Option menu.  
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 5 inches (12 cm) will end up with different  
size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 43.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and  
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
3 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround  
sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
1
Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the System Setup  
on page 7 if you’re unsure how to do this. Also see  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 9 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
menu.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
above if you’re not already at this screen.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume to the middle position.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
2.Surround Back System  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
Surround Back System  
Normal (SB)  
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup  
menu.  
7.Other Setup  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 34 if you’re not already at this screen.  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.  
• Normal (SB) – Select for normal home theater use  
with surround back speakers in your main (speaker  
system A) setup.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
3.Manual MCACC  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
e.EQ Professional  
7.Other Setup  
• 2nd Zone – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in  
another room (see Second Zone speaker B setup on  
page 55).  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to  
make these settings in order.  
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-  
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front  
speakers on page 56).  
• Fine Ch Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall  
balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel  
Level below).  
• Multi Room & Source – Select to use the (surround  
back) B speaker terminals for an independent system  
in another room (see Multi-room listening on  
page 57).  
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for  
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on  
page 38).  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low  
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing  
Wave on page 38).  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the  
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ on  
page 39:  
Manual MCACC setup  
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup  
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more  
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,  
you should have already completed Automatically setting  
up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7.  
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance  
of your speaker system while listening to test tones  
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 39).  
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on  
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make  
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb  
characteristics (see Professional Acoustic Calibration  
EQ on page 39).  
You only need to make these settings once (unless you  
change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers).  
Caution  
Fine Channel Level  
• Default setting: 0dB (all channels)  
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at  
high volume.  
You can achieve better surround sound by properly  
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The  
following setting can help you make detailed  
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual  
speaker setup on page 43.  
Important  
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you  
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing  
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu on page 34).  
1
Select ‘Fine Ch Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect  
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it  
about ear level at your normal listening position. See  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC)  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
The volume increases to the 0dB reference level.  
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC  
setup menu.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
3.Manual MCACC  
3b.Fine SP Distance  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
Please Wait... 20  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
1
e.EQ Professional  
Caution!  
Loud test tones  
will be output.  
L(Reference)  
10.0ft  
e.EQ Professional  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Return  
Enter:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.  
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want  
to keep the level around 0dB so that you’ll have plenty of  
room to adjust the other speaker levels.  
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the  
listening position.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance  
as necessary.  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
1
Use ꢂ/ꢃto adjust the delay of the speaker you selected  
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in  
terms of speaker distance from 0.5 to 45.0 feet.  
L(Reference)  
+0.5dB  
3b.Fine SP Distance  
Enter:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
(
]
)
L
10.0ft Reference  
R
[
9.0ft  
9.5ft  
6.0ft  
6.5ft  
6.0ft  
6.5ft  
C
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.  
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/  
12.5ft ]  
– 10dB) as necessary.  
ꢀ:Finish  
Use ꢂ/ꢃ to adjust the volume of the speaker you  
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds  
like both tones are the same volume, press ꢁ to confirm  
and continue to the next channel.  
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the  
target channel. From the listening position, face the two  
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each  
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are  
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
L
+0.5dB (Reference)  
R
[
0.0dB  
+1.0dB  
-3.0dB  
]
1
you and between your arm span.  
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
+10.0dB  
-10.0dB  
+9.5dB  
-1.5dB  
ꢀ:Finish  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use ꢀ/ꢁ to select it.  
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,  
press ꢁ to confirm and continue to the next channel.  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use ꢀ/ꢁ to select it.  
Fine Speaker Distance  
• Default setting: 10.0 ft (all speakers)  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,  
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some  
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening  
position at the same time. The following setting can help  
you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve  
using the Manual speaker setup below.  
Standing Wave  
• Default setting: ON  
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain  
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system  
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the  
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative  
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower  
Note  
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.  
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult  
to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your  
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,  
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The  
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of  
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During  
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used  
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC  
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3d.EQ Adjust  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
1
[
e.EQ Professional  
Setting Start?  
OK  
]
1
ꢀ:Return  
Enter:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
presets.  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC  
2
Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the  
setup menu.  
display is the one you want to adjust, then select OK.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3c.Standing Wave  
MCACC M1. MEMORY  
3
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
:
1
]
liking.  
Standing Wave Control  
[
ON  
MAIN  
Filter Ch  
e.EQ Professional  
3d.EQ Adjust  
unit:dB  
No.  
1
2
3
63Hz  
M1 125Hz  
[
[
[
[
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0  
f
[
[
[
68Hz  
5.0  
]
]
]
[
[
[
120Hz  
5.0  
]
]
]
[
[
[
201Hz  
5.0  
]
]
]
MCACC  
Ch  
:
Q
A
T
T
[SBL] 250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
2kHz  
4kHz  
[
[
[
[
-1.0]  
-2.0]  
-4.5]  
-7.0]  
8kHz  
16kHz  
2
Select ‘ON’ (if it is not already selected) then adjust  
TRIM [ 0.0]  
ꢀ:Finish  
the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.  
• Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply  
the filter(s): Main (all except center channel and  
subwoofer), Center or SUB W. (subwoofer).  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the channel.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the frequency and ꢂ/ꢃ  
to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to  
the top of the screen and use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select  
the next channel.  
• TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is  
SUB W.) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to  
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).  
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the  
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might  
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until  
OVER! disappears from the display.  
• f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f  
represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q  
is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the  
bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the  
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).  
Tip  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too  
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the  
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or  
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM  
feature. Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select TRIM then use ꢂ/ꢃ to  
raise or lower the channel level for the current  
speaker.  
Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room  
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It  
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your  
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that  
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’  
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the  
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 34, you can also adjust these  
settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits  
your tastes.  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room  
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It  
can also provide you with a graphical output of the  
2
frequency response of your room.  
Note  
1 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.  
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.  
2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer  
(with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 62 for more on this).  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it  
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,  
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner  
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the  
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of  
20~40ms to compensate for two major factors that will  
influence the sound of most rooms:  
How to use Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant  
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds `boomy'), or that  
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb  
characteristics, select Aco Cal EQ Pro. (or ALL) for the  
Auto Mode setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 34 to calibrate the room automatically. This should  
provide a balanced calibration that suits the  
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –  
Depending on your room, you may find that lower  
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to  
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).  
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the  
measurement is done too late.  
characteristics of your listening room.  
If you still aren't satisfied with the results, the manual  
Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized  
calibration of your system using the direct sound of the  
speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output  
that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer  
(with software available from Pioneer — see Connecting  
a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 62).  
Low  
frequencies  
Level  
High  
frequencies  
How to interpret the graphical output  
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time  
(in milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line  
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a  
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when  
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually  
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this  
usually takes about 100 ms or so).  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –  
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for  
each channel. Since this difference increases as the  
sound is influenced by the various room  
characteristics, it is often better to capture a  
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of  
channel frequencies/sounds.  
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how  
your room is responding to certain frequencies.  
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are  
taken into account automatically (compensation is  
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency  
measurements can be examined both with and without  
Left  
surround  
Level  
1
the equalization performed by this receiver.  
Right  
Surround  
Setting Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
according to your room characteristics  
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at  
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing  
the time that is best for system calibration with your  
particular room characteristics.  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often  
not necessary to make a 20~40ms setting. Later time  
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience  
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what  
works best for your particular room.  
The graph below shows the difference between standard  
acoustic calibration and professional calibration (the  
gray circles represent the point at which the microphone  
captures the sound for frequency analysis).  
Note that changing the room (for example, moving  
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.  
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.  
Level  
Test tone  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
Note  
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when  
comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can  
select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 80  
for troubleshooting information.  
Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’ then press ENTER.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3e.EQ Professional  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
1.Reverb Measurement  
2.Reverb View  
3.Reverb Output PC  
4.Advanced EQ Setup  
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the  
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press  
RETURN when you’re done.  
e.EQ Professional  
ꢀ:Return  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
3e2.Reverb View  
M1  
:
EQ OFF  
Ch  
Fq  
[
[
L
]
40Hz  
]
dB  
2
Select an option and press ENTER.  
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the  
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical  
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced  
MCACC output on page 62 to connect an RS-232C  
cable before selecting this option).  
0
80  
160ms  
ꢀ:Return  
This appears according to the setting you chose in  
Reverb Measurement (step 3 above). Use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons to select the channel and the frequency you want  
to check. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to go back and forth  
between the two. Note that the markers on the vertical  
axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.  
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb  
measurements made for specified frequency ranges  
in each channel.  
• Reverb Output PC – See Connecting a PC for  
Advanced MCACC output on page 62 for more on this.  
5
If you selected ‘Advanced EQ Setup’, input the  
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time  
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and  
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of  
your listening area. Note that customizing system  
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you  
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 34 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied with  
these settings.  
time setting you want to use for calibration, then  
select ‘Go’. Select ‘Start’ from the next screen.  
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can  
choose the time period that will be used for the final  
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you  
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is  
best to use the measurement results as a reference for  
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we  
recommend using the 20~40ms setting.  
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ  
ON or OFF and then OK.  
3e4. Adv. EQ Setup (1/2)  
3e4. Adv. EQ Setup (2/2)  
Ch  
Fq  
L
(
Back  
)
[
40Hz  
]
dB  
EQ Type  
3e1.Reverb Measurement  
3e1.Reverb Measurement  
Tm [60~80ms]  
[ALL CH ADJUST]  
Multi-Point  
NO  
…
MCACC: M1.MEMORY  
1
Now Analyzing  
(1/5)  
Setting Start?  
[OK]  
Measure with  
EQ OFF  
[OK]  
M1. MEMORY  
1
EQ:ON  
OK  
0
80  
160ms  
Setting Start?  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
Speaker Level  
Delay Check  
Reverb  
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
(
Next)  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ
:
Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the channel, frequency,  
and time setting. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to switch  
between them.  
The following options determine how the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in  
Reverb View and Reverb Output PC:  
You can switch between your connected speakers  
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the  
measurements for the following frequencies: 63 Hz, 125  
Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz and 16 kHz.  
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area without the equalization  
performed by this receiver (before calibration).  
Select the setting from the following time periods (in  
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,  
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be  
applied to all channels during calibration.  
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area with the equalization performed  
1
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ  
response may not appear entirely flat due to  
adjustments necessary for your listening area.  
When you’re finished, select OK. It will take about 1 to 4  
minutes for the calibration to finish.  
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are  
given the option to check the settings on-screen.  
Note  
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the  
System Setup menu and press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
Data Management  
07  
2
3
Select the setting you want to check.  
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you  
can compare the different settings.  
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,  
allowing you to calibrate your system for different  
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the  
Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons if necessary to switch speakers/  
settings.  
1
same listening position). This is useful for alternate  
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to  
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies  
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).  
4a4.EQ Data Check  
63Hz  
M1 125Hz  
[SBL] 250Hz  
500Hz  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0  
0.0  
MCACC  
Ch  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
-1.0  
-2.0  
-4.5  
-7.0  
0.0  
1kHz  
2kHz  
From this menu you can check your current settings,  
copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier  
identification and clear any ones you don’t need.  
4kHz  
8kHz  
16kHz  
TRIM  
ꢀ:Return  
1
Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Data Check menu,  
menu.  
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
above if you’re not already at this screen.  
4a2.Speaker Distance  
4a3.Standing Wave  
MCACC  
L
M1. MEMORY  
1
MCACC  
M1. MEMORY  
1
3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
10.5ft  
9.0ft  
10.0ft  
8.5ft  
7.0ft  
8.0ft  
8.0ft  
11.5ft  
Sranding Wave Control  
C
:
[
ON  
SUB W.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
4.Data Management  
R
SR  
Filter Ch  
TRIM  
]
:+12.0dB  
2
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
No.  
f
Q
1
:
:
:
110Hz  
3.0  
:
:
110Hz  
3.0  
:
:
:
110Hz  
3.0  
12.0dB  
ꢀ:Return  
A
T
T
SW  
12.0dB : 10.0dB  
ꢀ:Return  
7.Other Setup  
5
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
• MCACC Data Check – Check the settings for any of  
your MCACC presets using the on-screen display  
(see Checking MCACC preset data below).  
Copying MCACC preset data  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup above), we recommend  
2
• MCACC Data Copy – Copy settings from one  
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC  
preset data below).  
copying your current settings to an unused MCACC  
preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a  
reference point from which to start.  
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for  
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets  
below).  
1
Select ‘MCACC Data Copy’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
4.Data Management  
4b.MCACC Data Copy  
From  
• Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you  
don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets below).  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
[
M1. MEMORY 1 ]  
To  
[
M2. MEMORY 2 ]  
Start Copy  
[Cancel]  
Checking MCACC preset data  
After you have completed Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 34, you can check your  
calibrated settings using the on-screen display.  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Cancel  
2
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the  
settings ‘From’ then specify where you want to copy  
them (‘To’).  
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
1
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
4a.MCACC Data Check  
4.Data Management  
3
Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
1.Speaker Setting  
2.Channel Level  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Standing Wave  
5.Acoustic Cal EQ  
Copy Complete! shows in the OSD to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
ꢀ:Return  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
Note  
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 34, either of which you should  
have already completed.  
2 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 34.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
These settings are designed to customize your system,  
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on  
page 7, it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.  
Renaming MCACC presets  
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re  
using, you may want to rename them for easier  
identification.  
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data  
Caution  
Management setup menu.  
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at  
high volume.  
4.Data Management  
4c.Memory Rename  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
MCACC Position Rename  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
[
[
[
[
[
[
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
1
2
3
4
5
6
]
]
]
]
]
]
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ then press ENTER.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
5.Manual SP Setup  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then  
f.THX Audio Setting  
7.Other Setup  
select an appropriate preset name.  
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the preset, then ꢂ/ꢃ to select a  
preset name.  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,  
then press RETURN when you're finished.  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
• Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of  
speakers you’ve connected (see below).  
Clearing MCACC presets  
• Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your  
speaker system (page 44).  
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets  
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration  
settings of that preset.  
• Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your  
speakers from the listening position (page 45).  
1
Select ‘Memory Clear’ from the Data Management  
• Bass Peak Level – Prevent bass tones from distorting  
the sound from your speakers (page 45).  
setup menu.  
4.Data Management  
4d.Memory Clear  
Clear  
• X-Curve – Adjust the tonal balance of your speaker  
system for movie soundtracks (page 46).  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
M1. MEMORY  
1
• THX Audio Setting – Specify whether you are using  
a THX speaker setup (page 46).  
Start Clear  
[Cancel]  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Return  
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.  
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
Speaker Setting  
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration  
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is  
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on  
3
Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.  
Clear Complete! shows in the OSD to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
1
page 7 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all  
MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup  
Manual speaker setup  
menu.  
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to  
optimize the surround sound performance. You only  
need to make these settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers.).  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5a.Speaker Setting  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SMALL  
SMALL ]  
SMALL ]  
SMALL x2  
YES  
[
[
SB  
[
]
]
SUB W.  
[
[
f.THX Audio Setting  
X. OVER  
80Hz  
]
(THX:ALL SMALL )  
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ:Return  
Note  
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set  
Channel Level  
then select a speaker size.  
Use ꢂ/ꢃ to select the size (and number) of each of the  
following speakers:  
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the  
overall balance of your speaker system, an important  
factor when setting up a home theater system.  
1
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you  
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send  
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5b.Channel Level  
Test Tone  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
Manual  
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker  
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to  
the front speakers).  
f.THX Audio Setting  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Return  
2
3
Select a setup option.  
• Manual – Move the test tone manually from speaker  
to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.  
• Surround – Select LARGE if your surround speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a  
subwoofer).  
• Auto – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves  
from speaker to speaker automatically.  
Confirm your selected setup option.  
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.  
5b.Channel Level  
• Surr Back – Select the number of surround back  
speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGE  
Test Tone  
[
.
Manual  
]
2
Setting Start  
Please Wait  
.
.
20  
if your surround back speakers reproduce bass  
frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass  
frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If  
you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose  
NO.  
Caution!  
Loud test tones  
will be output.  
ꢀ:Cancel  
4
Adjust the level of each channel using the ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons.  
• Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of  
channels set to SMALL are output from the  
If you selected Manual, use ꢀ/ꢁto switch speakers. The  
Auto setup will output test tones in the order shown on-  
screen:  
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS  
setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass  
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the  
bass frequencies that would normally come out the  
front and center speakers are also routed to the  
5b.Channel Level  
L
0.0dB  
C
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
3
subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer  
choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from  
other speakers).  
ꢀ:Finish  
4
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is  
emitted.  
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.  
5
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Note  
1 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE  
if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.  
2 • If you selected 2nd Zone or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 36) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.  
3 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not,  
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass  
due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response  
with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having prob-  
lems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.  
4 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing  
back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
•If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
2
Select a setup option.  
Tip  
5d.Bass Peak Level  
• You can change the channel levels at any time by  
pressing CH LEVEL then using ꢂ/ꢃ on the remote  
control.  
Bass Peak Level  
[Setting Start  
[Setting Clear  
:OFF  
]
]
Enter:Setting Start  
ꢀ:Return  
Speaker Distance  
For good sound depth and separation from your system,  
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from  
the listening position. The receiver can then add the  
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.  
• Setting Start – The volume is set to –60 dB, a test  
tone plays back and you make the setting.  
• Setting Clear – Clears any previous setting and  
switches limiting off.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
3
If you selected ‘Setting Start’, use ꢂ/ꢃ to adjust  
the test tones and specify the bass peak level then press  
ENTER  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5c.Speaker Distance  
.
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
L
3.0ft  
C
R
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
3.0ft ]  
3.0ft ]  
3.0ft ]  
3.0ft ]  
3.0ft ]  
3.0ft ]  
3.0ft ]  
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
5d.Bass Peak Level  
Bass Peak Level  
f.THX Audio Setting  
-60dB  
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ:Return  
Increase the Bass  
Peak Level to  
a
comfortable Volume  
(-80=no sound)  
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using theꢂ/ꢃ  
ENTER:Finish  
ꢀ:Cancel  
buttons.  
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.5 feet  
increments.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Tip  
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround  
back speakers are the same distance from the  
listening position.  
Bass Peak Level  
Some audio sources (for example, Dolby Digital and DTS)  
include ultra-low bass tones. Set the bass limiter as  
needed to prevent the bass from distorting the sound.  
1
Select ‘Bass Peak Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
The current setting is displayed. When OFF is displayed  
the attenuator is off (bass output is not affected).  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5d.Bass Peak Level  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
Bass Peak Level  
[Setting Start  
[Setting Clear  
:OFF  
]
]
f.THX Audio Setting  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Return  
5 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB  
SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).  
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Set the bass peak level gradually, then press ENTER at  
the point just before the tone starts to distort. The  
display on the receiver shows RESUME while the volume  
returns to its original position, then you automatically  
return to the main Bass Peak Level menu.  
THX Audio Setting  
1
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2  
Cinema and THX MusicMode listening modes (see Using  
the Home THX modes on page 28) with the Advanced  
Speaker Array (ASA) system (see About THX on page 85),  
it is required that you make the setting. See Placing the  
speakers on page 18 for more on THX speaker  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
3
placement.  
X-Curve  
1
Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright  
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting  
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater  
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie  
Setup menu.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
2
soundtracks.  
f.THX Audio Setting  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.  
ꢀ:Return  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5e.X-Curve  
X-Curve  
2
Specify the distance of your surround back speakers  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
-2.0dB/oct  
from each other.  
f.THX Audio Setting  
5f.THX Audio Setting  
SB SP Position  
0-1 ft  
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ:Return  
SBL-SBR  
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.  
Use ꢂ/ꢃto adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed  
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at  
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope  
increases (to a maximum of -3.0dB/oct). Use the  
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your  
room size:  
ꢀ:Finish  
• 0–1 ft – Surround speakers within 1 foot apart (best  
for THX surround sound).  
• >1– 4 ft – Surround speakers between 1 and 4 feet  
apart.  
• 4 ft < – Surround speakers more than 4 feet apart.  
Room size (ft2)  
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
400 550 650 800 2200 12000  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5 –1 –1.5 –2 –2.5 –3  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and  
the X-Curve has no effect.  
3
Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.  
Note  
1 If the YES or PLUS setting on the subwoofer is selected (in Speaker Setting on page 43), the test tone will only play back from the subwoofer. If not, the  
test tone will play back from the front and surround speakers set to LARGE.  
2 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 28).  
3 If you don't have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won't be able to select this setting (Cannot select shows in the display).  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Chapter 8:  
Other connections  
1
Switch the receiver into standby then use the  
Caution  
2
supplied iPod control cable to connect your iPod to the  
iPod jack on the rear of the receiver.  
Push the connector in until you hear it click home. To  
disconnect, squeeze the connector (as shown) to release  
the catch, then pull out.  
• Make sure the power is switched off before making or  
changing the connections.  
Connecting an iPod  
2
Switch the receiver on and press the iPod input  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
you to control playback of audio and video from your iPod  
source button to switch the receiver to the iPod.  
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver  
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.  
1
using the controls of this receiver.  
3
Use the TOP MENU button to display iPod Top  
menu.  
Connecting your iPod to the receiver  
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play  
3
music from the iPod.  
• If after pressing iPod the display shows No  
Connection, try switching off the receiver and  
reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.  
AM LO
MULTI-ROO
ROO
R
OUT  
iPod playback  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
To navigate music, photos or video on your iPod it’s  
easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage  
of the OSDs. If you are only listening to music you can,  
TV  
IN  
(
)
Single  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
SAT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
4
FR  
FL  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
A
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
SUB W.  
CENTER  
however, use just the receiver’s front panel display to do  
everything if you prefer.  
OUT  
SUR-  
DVR/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
IN  
R
R
L
L
OUT  
DVR/  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
Finding what you want to play  
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
When connected to this receiver, you can browse music,  
photos or video stored on your iPod. When browsing  
music, you can browse by playlist, artist, album name,  
song name, genres or composers, similar to using the  
iPod directly.  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
iPod cable  
(5 ft. / 4 oz)  
iPod  
Music  
Extras  
Settings  
Shuffle Songs  
Backlight  
>
>
>
iPod Top  
MENU  
[ Playlists  
[ Artists  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
Albums  
ꢇ
ꢆ
[ Songs  
[
Genres  
[ Composers  
ꢃꢅ  
[ Shuffle Songs  
iPod  
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁbuttons to select a category then press  
ENTER to browse that category.  
• To return to the previous level, press RETURN.  
Note  
1 This system is compatible with an iPod, iPod mini and iPod Photo portable device (third generation and above), however, compatibility may vary depend-  
ing on the software version of your iPod. This receiver does not support software versions prior to iPod update 2004-10-20. For supported versions, consult  
your local Pioneer dealer.  
2 • This product is the Pioneer Control Cable for use with an iPod® (third generation and above), iPod Mini or iPod Photo.  
• This cable is for connection only to the dock connector port of the iPod.  
• For detailed instructions on using the iPod, please refer to the manual supplied with the iPod.  
• The connected iPod should be updated with iPod updater software higher than version 2004-10-20.  
3 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver (Pioneer shows in the iPod display). Features such as the equalizer cannot  
be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.  
• You can’t use the iPod and XM Radio functions simultaneously using the multi-room feature on page 57.  
4 • Note that non-roman characters in playlists will be displayed as #.  
• When watching video content from your iPod, you can only use the iPod controls, and the receiver OSD doesn’t appear (iPod video takes priority).  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to browse the selected  
Watching photos and video content  
To view photos or video on your iPod, since video control  
is not possible using this receiver, you must use the main  
controls of your iPod instead.  
category (e.g., albums).  
• Use ꢂ/ꢃ to move to previous/next levels.  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
1
1
Press PHOTO to switch to the iPod controls for  
want to play, then press  
ꢃ
to start playback.  
photo and video playback.  
The receiver controls will be unavailable while you are  
watching iPod videos or browsing photos.  
Navigation through audio categories on your iPod looks  
like this:  
Playlist ꢄ Song  
Artist ꢄ Album ꢄ Song  
Album ꢄ Song  
Song  
2
Press PHOTO again to switch back to the receiver  
controls when you’re done.  
Genre ꢄ Artist ꢄ Album ꢄ Song  
Composer ꢄ Album ꢄ Song  
Shuffle Songs  
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
Tip  
Using XM Radio  
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category  
by selecting the All item at the top of each category  
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a  
particular artist.  
XM is the leading provider of satellite radio service in the  
United States. Through two high-power satellites, Rock  
and Roll, XM Radio service offers over 150 channels of  
music, news, talk, sports and children's programming on  
a monthly subscription basis. XM Radio offers  
consumers clear sound quality from digital signal radios,  
an extensive variety of programming and nationwide  
coverage. Visit www.xmradio.com for more details on  
this service.  
Basic playback controls  
The following table shows the basic playback controls for  
your iPod:  
Button  
What it does  
ꢃ
Press to start playback.  
Connecting your XM Radio receiver  
If you start playback when something other than a  
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that cat-  
egory will play.  
After purchasing a Connect-and Play™ antenna (sold  
separately), you will also need to activate the XM Radio  
2
digital radio service to receive broadcasts.  
ꢄ
ꢅ
Press to stop playback.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
&
SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
R
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
S400  
(AUDIO)  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
C
OUT2  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
ꢈ/ꢉ Press and hold during playback to start scanning.  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
ꢇ/ꢆ Press to skip to previous/next song.  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(DVR/  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
)
)
VCR  
1
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
IN  
R
3
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR  
L
2
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One,  
Repeat All and Repeat Off.  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
(CD-R)  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
IN  
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
IN  
LD)  
IN  
Y
Y
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle Songs,  
Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.  
2
IN  
(CD)  
R
R
L
L
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
IN  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
XM  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed.  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-84TXSi  
ꢂ/ꢃ  
During playback, press to skip to previous/next  
playlist; when browsing, press to move to previous/  
next levels.  
TOP  
Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.  
MENU  
RETURN  
Press to return to the previous level.  
Connect-and-Play antenna  
Note  
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.  
2 Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly cost. Installation costs and other  
fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels  
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions  
subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com. Only available in the 48 contiguous United States.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
1
Connect an XM Radio Connect-and-Play™ antenna  
Tip  
to the XM Radio jack on the rear of this receiver.  
You will also need to activate the XM Radio service.  
• You can select channels directly by pressing  
D.ACCESS then the three-digit channel number.  
When activating the XM Radio ‘Connect-and-Play’ ™  
digital antenna, make sure to wait until the activation  
process is complete before changing the XM-RADIO  
function. Changing to another input source will stop the  
activation process.  
• You can press DISP to change XM Radio information  
in the front panel display.  
Using XM HD Surround  
XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround™ technology to  
achieve optimal surround sound from XM radio.  
2
Use the XM RADIO (SHIFT+TUNER) input source  
1
button to switch to the XM RADIO input.  
For best reception, you may need to move the Connect-  
and-Play™ antenna near a window (the southernmost  
window should produce the best results).  
•
While listening to XM Radio, press AUTO SURR  
for XM HD Surround listening.  
See About Neural Surround™ below for more on this.  
• If after pressing XM RADIO the display shows Check  
About Neural Surround™  
Antenna, try disconnecting the antenna and  
Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in  
surround technology and has been adopted by XM  
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcasts of surround  
recordings and live events.  
2
reconnecting.  
Listening to XM Radio  
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to  
select channels, navigate categories and save song  
information (like the artist’s name) using the on-screen  
Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency  
domain processing which allows delivery of a more  
detailed sound stage with superior localization of  
surround elements. System playback is scalable from  
stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.  
3
display. The information displayed is as follows:  
Preset class  
Signal strength  
Category  
XM Satellite Radio  
Decades  
A
Neural Surround™ is trademark owned by Neural Audio  
Corporation.  
A0  
XM005  
Preset number  
The 50s  
Channel number  
Artist name  
Remy Sherman  
Lovin' You  
Saving channel presets  
This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in  
three banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 stations each.  
Song name  
Channel name  
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the XM channel Guide, you can browse XM Radio  
channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow  
your channel search by genre.  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.  
2
Press T.EDIT  
.
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes then  
XM Satellite Radio  
Decades  
A
XM Channel Guide  
Previous  
press ꢂ/ꢃ to select the channel preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
000 RADIO ID  
001 XM Preview  
004 The 40s  
005 The 50s  
006 The 60s  
007 The 70s  
008 The 80s  
009 The 90s  
Next  
A0  
XM005  
The 50s  
• The default for all presets is XM001.  
Remy Sherman  
Lovin' You  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel.  
•
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a channel then press  
ENTER to listen to the XM radio broadcast.  
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use ꢀ/ꢁ  
to select a genre then press ENTER.  
Tip  
4
• You can also press MEMORY during reception  
display to save the information of up to 8 songs. See  
Using the XM Menu below to recall this information.  
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.  
Note  
1 You can’t use the iPod and XM Radio functions simultaneously using the multi-room feature on page 57.  
2 • You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu above.  
• After unplugging the receiver, LOADING shows in the display for about 1 minute when switched back on.  
3 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the OSDs. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer.  
4 Select XM000 (RADIO ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the Connect-and-Play antenna.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Listening to channel presets  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this.  
Connecting using HDMI  
If you have a HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped compo-  
nent, you can connect it to this receiver using a commer-  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel  
is stored.  
1
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.  
cially available HDMI cable.  
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the  
connected component is compatible with, including  
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio (see below for limitations), Video  
CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See About the video  
converter on page 11 for more on HDMI compatibility.  
2
Press ꢂ/ꢃ to select the channel preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the channel preset.  
Using the XM Menu  
The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features.  
1
Press TOP MENU.  
HDMI/DVI-equipped component  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select a menu item then press ENTER  
.
HDMI OUT  
Choose between the following menu items:  
• Memory Recall – Use ꢀ/ꢁ to browse your saved  
song information (see Tip above).  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
• Channel Skip/Add – Use ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to  
the channel guide.  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
OUT  
• Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite  
and terrestrial reception.  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
)
TV  
IN  
R
3
IN  
2
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to  
the reception display.  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(
)
CD-R  
1
4
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
SUB W.  
C
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
LD  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
(
)
®
Connect & Play™, XM-Ready and The Ultimate Playlist are  
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005 XM Satellite  
Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the  
property of their respective owners.  
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
SURROUN  
BAC  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MUL  
IN  
X
OUT  
CONTROL  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-84TXSi  
HDMI IN  
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor  
or plasma display  
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect on of the HDMI IN  
interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on  
your HDMI component.  
HDMI appears on the front panel when an HDMI-  
equipped component is connected.  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIꢄHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support  
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
• This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.2. Depending on the component you have  
connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to  
output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
2
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT  
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect  
on a HDMI-compatible monitor.  
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be  
facing right for correct alignment with the connector  
on the player.  
Using the i.LINK interface  
VSX-84TXSi only  
If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you  
can connect it to this receiver using an i.LINK cable.  
Since the i.LINK interface does not transmit video  
signals, the video signal of i.LINK-connected compo-  
nents must be connected with other cables (see  
Connecting your equipment on page 10 for more on  
making video connections). If you’ve already hooked up  
the video signal from the component, assign the i.LINK  
input to the input function to which you’ve connected the  
video signals (see The Input Setup menu on page 63). See  
Checking the i.LINK inputs below to confirm your i.LINK  
settings.  
3
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI  
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).  
You can also use the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.  
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the AV options on  
page 66 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI  
audio output from your TV or plasma display (no  
sound will be heard from this receiver).  
The two i.LINK connectors on the rear of your receiver are  
4-pin connectors. Use a 4-pin, S400 i.LINK cable to  
connect i.LINK-equipped components.  
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or  
plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings  
on your component or display. Note that some  
components (such as video game units) have  
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,  
use an analog video connection.  
Caution  
• If your i.LINK connector comes into contact with  
metallic parts of the receiver other than the i.LINK  
terminal, an electrical short may occur. Some cables  
have metal parts that may touch the unit when  
connected. Please take care to use a suitable i.LINK  
cable only.  
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s  
digital out jacks.  
About HDMI  
Important  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports  
both video and audio on a single digital connection for  
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV  
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technolo-  
gies of High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one  
specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content  
transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.  
• Please use 4-pin, S400 cables less than 3.5 meters  
long. Although longer ones are available, they may  
not work reliably.  
• There may be cases where the PQLS/rate control  
function and/or the i.LINK audio does not work prop-  
erly even when connected to i.LINK Audio-compat-  
ible equipment.  
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,  
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel  
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncom-  
pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes  
per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead  
of several cables and connectors), and communication  
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
• Do not connect/disconnect i.LINK cables or switch  
on/off any components connected using i.LINK when  
the receiver is on.  
HDMI, the  
logo and High-Definition Multi-  
media Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI licensing LLC.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
1
Use an i.LINK cable to connect one of the i.LINK  
Checking the i.LINK inputs  
connectors on this receiver to an i.LINK connector on  
your i.LINK component.  
If you have several i.LINK-equipped components and  
have assigned them to input functions in The Input Setup  
menu on page 63, you can confirm the settings you made  
below.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
&
SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
S400  
IN1  
IN  
1
Select ‘i.LINK Check’ from the Other Setup menu  
(
)
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
and press ENTER.  
See The Other Setup menu on page 64 for more on  
navigating this menu screen.  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
2
(DC O12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(DVR/  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
)
1
VCR  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
R
3
IN  
(DVR/  
L
2
• If no i.LINK-equipped components are connected  
i.LINK Check cannot be selected.  
)
2
VCR  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
(CD-R)  
PB  
PB  
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
PR  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
IN  
LD)  
IN  
Y
Y
2
IN  
7.Other Setup  
7d.i.LINK Check  
(1/2)  
R
R
L
L
(CD)  
OUT  
PB  
PB  
a.Multi Room Setup  
(
DVD-Audio5  
DVD-Audio1  
DVD-Audio2  
DVD-Audio3  
DVD-Audio4  
VSX-59TXi  
(
End  
)
)
DVR/  
IN  
b.SR+ Setup  
*
:
:
:
:
:
:
TV  
DVD  
DVR  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
----  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
1
2
3
4
5
P
R
P
R
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
XM  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
3
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Next  
VSX-84TXSi  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Return  
S400  
2
Scroll through the list to confirm your settings.  
When a number of i.LINK-equipped components are  
connected to your receiver, the i.LINK-equipped  
component you are looking for might be listed on  
additional display screens.  
(AUDIO)  
• i.LINK is displayed after unassigned device names  
i.LINK-equipped component  
(e.g. DV-79AVi [i.LINK]).  
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be  
lined up with the arrow (to the left of the connector)  
on the receiver for correct alignment. The i.LINK  
cable should be inserted straight into the connector  
so that it snaps easily into place. If not connected  
properly the receiver will not be able to recognize any  
connected components. Note that the i.LINK cable is  
fragile and can be broken easily if too much force is  
used when connecting.  
• If a connected devices cannot output (playback) a  
source using the i.LINK connection, [- - - -] is  
displayed after the input device name (e.g. DV-79AVi  
[- - - -]). Non-compatible devices cannot be assigned  
to inputs.  
• When the cables for an assigned input device  
become loose or the power is cut to the device, an  
asterisk (*) appears before the device name (e.g.  
*DV-79AVi [CD]).  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
About i.LINK  
2
Assign the i.LINK component to the input you want,  
i.LINK is a trademark name for IEEE1394, a high-speed  
interface for digital audio, video and other data found on  
personal computers, digital camcorders, and other kinds  
of audio and audio/visual equipment. A single i.LINK  
connector can both send and receive data at the same  
time, so only one cable is required to connect compo-  
nents for two-way communication.  
then make any necessary output settings on the  
component.  
See The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign the  
component to an input function on this receiver. Follow  
the operating instructions that came with the component  
to make any necessary output settings.  
• You can connect several components together using  
i.LINK. See Creating an i.LINK network below.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
The system will not work if the connected components  
form a loop. If a loop is detected, the message LOOP  
CONNECT shows in the display. Figs. 3 and 4 show  
connections that form a loop.  
About PQLS rate control  
Pioneer's PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System)  
technology provides high-precision digital audio from  
DVD-A, SACD and audio CD sources when you use the  
i.LINK interface. A precision quartz controller in this  
receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors  
(jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog  
conversion from the digital source.  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 3  
To take advantage of PQLS, you must have a player  
compatible with rate-control, and it must be switched on  
and connected to this receiver through the i.LINK  
network.  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 4  
Creating an i.LINK network  
Using i.LINK it is possible to chain up to 17 components  
together so that the digital audio and control signals  
from each component is available to other components  
in the network. With the addition of an i.LINK repeater,  
it’s possible to connect up to 63 components.  
Another consideration when connecting i.LINK devices  
is the speed of the interface. At present there are three  
speeds; S100 (slowest), S200 and S400 (fastest). This  
receiver uses the S400 type. Although you can use  
components with different speeds together, we  
recommend connecting slower-speed components at  
the edge of the network if possible (shown by the shaded  
boxes in figs. 1 and 2). This will keep the network free of  
bottlenecks.  
i.LINK connectors come in 4-pin and 6-pin configura-  
tions. This player uses the 4-pin connection, but the two  
types can be mixed on a network.  
This receiver is compatible with i.LINK Audio (A&M  
protocol) components, such as DVD players. Note that  
when connected to i.LINK MPEG-II TS equipment (such  
as a digital satellite tuner), i.LINK DV equipment (such as  
a DVD recorder or DV camcorder), or an i.LINK-equipped  
personal computer, audio and video signals are not  
transmitted, and connecting to these devices sometimes  
causes network interruptions. Check the operating  
instructions supplied with your other i.LINK components  
for compatibility information.  
When used within an i.LINK network, this receiver must  
be on for the i.LINK connection to be maintained. Other  
components in the network may or may not maintain the  
connection in standby (none will when the power is  
completely off)—check the operating instructions  
supplied with individual components. Note that the audio  
may be momentarily interrupted if a component in the  
i.LINK network is switched on/off, or its i.LINK  
connection is switched on/off.  
This receiver is DTCP (Digital Transmission Content  
Protection) compliant, so you can play DVD-A, DVD-  
Video, and SACD i.LINK audio.  
This product complies with the following i.LINK interface  
specifications:  
1) IEEE Std. 1394a-2000, Standard for a High Performance  
Serial Bus  
When setting up an i.LINK network, it’s important that  
the components form an open ended chain (fig. 1), or a  
tree (fig. 2).  
2) Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.0  
Following the standard for AM824 sequence adaptation  
layers, the product is compatible with IEC60958 bitstream,  
DVD-A and SACD.  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 1  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 2  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the  
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be  
too low. In this case switch the receiver into standby,  
then press ꢁ STANDBY/ON while holding down  
VIDEO SELECT on the front panel. This switches  
between SW IN +10dB (increase of 10 decibels) and  
SW IN 0dB (default) in the subwoofer channel.  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may  
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending  
on whether your player supports surround back  
1
channels). Make sure that the player is set to output  
multichannel analog audio.  
1
Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer  
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding  
MULTI CH input jack on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
Using the USB interface  
VSX-84TXSi only  
It is possible to listen to two channels of audio from your  
computer by connecting to the USB interface on the rear  
of this receiver. Depending on your model of computer  
and the software installed, you can listen to the stereo  
audio source through the speaker setup you’ve  
2
If your DVD player also has outputs for surround  
back channels, connect these to the corresponding  
MULTI CH input jacks on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
3
connected to this receiver.  
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to  
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this  
receiver.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
&
SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
S
IN  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as  
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs  
(
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
1
VCR  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
)
TV  
IN  
R
3
IN  
L
2
(
DVR/  
)
2
VCR  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(
)
CD-R  
2
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
for surround sound playback.  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
L
L
(
)
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
OUT  
PB  
PB  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
DVR/  
IN  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
XM  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-84TXSi  
B-type USB  
connector  
A-type USB  
connector  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the  
proper output setting.  
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to  
output multichannel analog audio.  
Personal computer  
2
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select MULTI CH IN.  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel.  
Note  
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH INPUT (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
above for more on this).  
2 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, you can’t use Midnight/Loudness, Dialog Enhancement or the SIGNAL SELECT and ANA-  
LOG ATT buttons, as well as any of the listening modes (including STEREO and the surround back channel processing).  
• When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.  
• You can’t listen to your speaker B (Second Zone) system during playback from the multichannel inputs.  
3 • Windows® XP, Windows® 2000, Windows® Millennium Edition and Windows® 98 Second Edition operating systems have been tested for compatibility  
with this interface, but depending on your computer setup, you may find that your system is not compatible.  
• Make sure you use a USB cable that connects from an A-type connector (from your PC) to a 4-pin B-type connector (to the receiver).  
• The USB specification is version 1.1 compatible, and the USB Audio Class specification is 1.0 compatible.  
• Any computer alert sounds will also be heard through the speakers unless you switch them off from the computer’s control panel.  
• You won’t be able to hear the audio from the USB connection through the digital outputs of this receiver.  
• Note that using hubs or extensions may cause connection problems.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
1
Connect your computer’s USB terminal to the USB  
terminal on the rear panel of this receiver.  
Second Zone speaker B setup  
2
Switch on your computer and this receiver.  
Caution  
3
If you’re connecting for the first time, wait for the  
USB driver installation to finish.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off  
the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the  
last connection you make with your system.  
The installation may take a minute or two to complete.  
Make sure you leave the USB cable connected until the  
dialog box indicates that the USB setup is finished. Note  
that some older operating systems may require a disc for  
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker  
wires from different terminals.  
1
installation.  
4
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select USB.  
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance  
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the  
speaker impedance on page 68 if you plan to use  
speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel.  
5
Make any necessary settings required to select the  
After selecting 2nd Zone in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 36, you can use the speakers connected  
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear  
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See  
Switching the speaker system below for the listening  
options with this setup.  
USB interface as your computer audio output.  
You will need to make sure the correct speaker setting is  
selected with the audio software you’re using. Please  
refer to the manual that came with the software to make  
these settings.  
6
Turn up the volume control on your computer and  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
this receiver.  
speaker terminals on the rear panel.  
You may want to start with a fairly low volume on this  
receiver and turn it up as necessary after you’ve checked  
your levels.  
Connect them the same way you connected your  
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 17.  
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 18  
when placing the speakers in another room.  
7
Start playback of a source on your computer.  
2
Select ‘2nd Zone’ from the ‘Surr Back System’ menu.  
Caution  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 36 to do this.  
• Make sure you don’t switch off the computer or  
unplug the USB cable during playback.  
Switching the speaker system  
If you selected 2nd Zone in Surround back speaker setting  
on page 36, three speaker system settings are possible  
using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Normal (SB)  
or Front Bi-Amp, the button will simply switch your main  
speaker system on or off. The options below are for the  
• To prevent noise being output, don’t use other  
software on your computer during playback.  
• Pioneer is not responsible for computer system  
damage, software crashes or failures, or any other  
possible computer problems due to this  
configuration.  
2
2nd Zone setting only.  
Microsoft®, Windows® XP, Windows® 2000, Windows®  
Millennium Edition, Windows® 98, and Windows NT® are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
•
Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to  
select a speaker system setting.  
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal (SB),  
the button will simply switch your main speaker system  
(A) on or off.  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:  
Note  
1 If your PC doesn’t recognize the receiver, try disconnecting the USB cable and connecting it again. If it is still unrecognized, restart the computer.  
2 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 43. However, if SPꢃB is selected above, no sound is heard  
from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 36 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.  
• All speaker systems (except 2nd Zone connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
• SPꢃA – Sound is output from speaker system A and  
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.  
Caution  
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals  
have two metal plates that connect the High to the  
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are  
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely  
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for  
more information.  
• SPꢃB – Sound is output from the two speakers  
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel  
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output  
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.  
• SPꢃAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up  
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two  
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.  
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as  
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).  
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,  
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing  
so may damage your speakers.  
• SPꢃ(off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The  
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals  
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as  
when selecting speaker system A (above).  
Bi-wiring your speakers  
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi-  
amping, but additionally, interference effects within the  
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to  
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they  
must have separate terminals for the high and low  
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected  
Normal (SB) or 2nd Zone in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 36.  
Bi-amping your front speakers  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver  
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different  
amplifiers (in this case, to both front and surround back  
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your  
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement  
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.  
•
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to  
the speaker terminal on the receiver.  
Using a banana plug for the second connection is  
recommended.  
1
Connect your speakers as shown below.  
This illustration below shows the connections for bi-  
amping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right  
speaker in the same way.  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND BACK  
/
B
A
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
R
L(Single)  
Front left  
speaker  
SELECTABLE  
Caution  
High  
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are  
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your  
speakers.  
Low  
• Don't connect different speakers from the same  
terminal in this way.  
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals  
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front  
or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low)  
of the speaker.  
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly  
inserted.  
2
Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the ‘Surr Back  
System’ menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 36 to specify  
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Connecting additional amplifiers  
Multi-room listening  
This receiver has more than enough power for any home  
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every  
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the  
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power  
your speakers.  
This receiver can power up to three independent systems  
in separate rooms after you have made the proper multi-  
room connections. An example multi-room setup is  
shown below, but the number of multi-room connections  
(and the way you choose to connect them) depends on  
how you want to set up your system.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
AC outlet.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
A
&
SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
&
/
REC SEL  
PHON  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
L
R
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
(DVR/  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
VCR 1)  
1
OUT  
Y
PRE OUT  
L
IN  
Y
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
Front channel  
amplifier  
SAT  
IN  
R
IN  
R
FRONT  
IN  
3
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
CENTER  
SUB W.  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
Sub room (ZONE 3)  
Sub room (ZONE 2)  
Main room  
SUR-  
ROUND  
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
SUR-  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
&
S
O
URCE  
&
ANTENNA  
ROUND  
BACK  
/
R
E
C
SEL  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
HDMI  
IN1  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
MULTI-ROOM  
(
)
1
2
Single  
IN  
IN  
IN  
(SAT)  
1
OUT  
R
L
&
SOURCE  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
IN  
Y
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
TV)  
SA  
T
Powered  
subwoofer  
IN  
R
IN  
3
IN  
L
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO  
/
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
L
1
4
SUB  
W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
2
OUT  
IN  
1
1
2
iPod  
DVR/  
SUR-  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
R
3
VCR  
1
IN  
IN  
LD)  
SPEAKERS  
A
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
(CD)  
2
L
L
IN  
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
IN  
R
FRONT  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR  
2
R
CENTER  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
XM  
MULTI CH  
IN  
DIGITAL IN  
OUT  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
ANALOG  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
L
R
Surround channel  
amplifier  
L
L
ANALOG  
IR receiver  
RS-232C  
UND  
ACK  
INPUT  
L
R
ULTI CH  
IN  
Surround back  
channel amplifier  
Different sources can be playing in three rooms at the  
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source  
can also be used (however, if iPod or XM Radio is  
selected in the main room, it cannot also be selected in  
the sub room). The main and sub rooms have  
independent power (the main room power can be off  
while one (or both) of the sub rooms is on) and the sub  
rooms can be controlled by the remote or front panel  
controls. However, you may need to specify the volume  
settings in Multi-Room Setup on page 65.  
VSX-84TXSi  
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround  
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In  
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))  
terminal only.  
• The sound from the surround back terminals will  
depend on how you have configured the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 36.  
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the  
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any  
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.  
Making multi-room connections  
It is possible to make these connections if you have a  
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ROOM 2) sub  
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front  
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 43) to  
large.  
1
room, and a separate amplifier (and speakers) for your  
secondary (ROOM 3) sub room. You will also need a  
separate amplifier if you are not using the Surround Back  
System setup (see below) for your primary sub room.  
There are two primary sub room setups possible with this  
system. Choose whichever works best for you.  
Note  
1 You can't use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub room. You  
can, however, use the features available with your sub room amplifier.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
•
Connect a TV monitor to the MULTI-ROOM &  
Multi-room listening options  
The following table shows what you can listen to in each  
sub room:  
SOURCE MONITOR OUT jacks on the rear of this  
receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the  
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.  
Sub room  
Input sources available  
ROOM2 (ZONE2) iPod, XM Radio, the built-in tuner and other  
analog audio sources (except MULTI CH IN).  
With video sources, only composite video is  
possible. Please note that the XM-Radio  
function is not available for sub room (ROOM2)  
listening when using the multi-room feature  
with the VSX-82TXS.  
Sub room  
Main room  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
&
S
O
URCE  
&
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
/
R
E
C
SEL  
R
FRONT  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
L
CENTER  
OUT2  
SUB  
W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
SUR-  
AUDIO  
IN  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
AC OUTLET  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
MULTI-ROOM  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
IN  
1
(SAT)  
(DC OUT 12V  
ROOM2  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
&
SOURCE  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
(Single)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
IN  
1
OUT  
Y
SWITCHED 100 W(0.8A) MAX  
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
DVD/LD)  
TV)  
SA  
T
Y
IN  
R
IN  
3
IN  
L
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO  
/
SPEAKERS  
A
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
SURROUND BACK  
/
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
B
ROOM3 (ZONE3) Only digital audio sources (the input source  
must already be assigned using the The Input  
Setup menu on page 63) are available.  
1
4
SUB  
W.  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
R
L(Single)  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
2
OUT  
IN  
1
1
2
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
R
3
VCR  
1
IN  
IN  
LD)  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
(
2
CD  
)
L
L
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
IN  
R
SURROUND  
BACK  
RS-232C  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
XM  
MULTI CH  
IN  
SELECTABLE  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASBLE  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Basic multi-room setup (ROOM 2)  
S400  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
1
Connect a separate amplifier to the MULTI-ROOM &  
IN1  
1
2
SURROUND BACK /  
B
(
L
)
Single  
L
R
(
)
DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX  
SOURCE OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the MULTI-  
ROOM & SOURCE MONITOR OUT jacks, both on the rear  
of this receiver.  
ROOM2  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
MONITOR  
OUT  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
IN  
IN  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
room amplifier as shown in the following illustration.  
PHONO  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
AM LOOP  
S400  
IN1  
IN2  
IN  
Secondary multi-room setup (ROOM 3)  
Connect a separate amplifier to the OUT1 ROOM3  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
S400  
OUT  
•
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
1
2
IN  
IN  
(ZONE3) digital output on the rear of this receiver.  
The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make  
this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital  
(
)
DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX  
ROOM2  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
)
TV  
IN  
R
1
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
output of a component in a second sub room.  
Sub room  
Main room  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
& SOURCE  
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
ZONE3  
)
S400  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AU  
&
S
O
URCE  
&
ANTENNA  
/
R
E
C
SEL  
PHONO  
(
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
IN1  
IN2  
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
( )  
AUDIO  
ROOM2  
(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
OUT2  
USB  
HDMI  
IN1  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
(SAT)  
1
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
S400  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
IN  
Y
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
IN  
1
1
(DVD/LD)  
TV)  
SAT  
IN  
2
IN  
R
IN  
3
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
VIDEO  
/
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
1
4
SUB  
W.  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
PR  
2
IN  
1
1
2
SUR-  
Sub room (ROOM 3)  
Main room  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
3
VCR  
1
IN  
IN  
LD)  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
(CD)  
2
R
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
IN  
R
S
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
XM  
OU  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
CONTR  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
S
O
URCE  
&
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
/
R
E
C
SEL  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2  
(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
L
OUT2  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
(SAT)  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
C
T
IN  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
2
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
3
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
VIDEO  
GAME1  
IN  
/
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
PB  
PB  
PR  
1
4
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
2
OUT  
IN  
1
1
2
DVR/  
(DVD/  
3
VCR  
1
LD)  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
2
(CD)  
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
Surround Back System multi-room setup (ROOM 2)  
You must select MR&S in Surround back speaker setting  
on page 36 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the  
sub room will be temporarily interrupted when  
controlling the main room (for example, changing the  
input source or starting playback).  
IN  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
XM  
DIGITAL IN  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Note  
1 Only one sub room is possible if you connect the OUT1 ROOM3 (ZONE3) digital output to your second sub room.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
• If you select TUNER, you can use the front panel  
TUNER controls to select a preset station (see Saving  
station presets on page 33 if you’re unsure how to do  
Using the multi-room controls  
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust  
the sub room volume and select sources. See Multi-room  
remote controls below and (VSX-84TXSi only) Sub remote  
control unit on page 26 for more on using the remote  
control with the multi-room feature.  
3
this).  
• You can’t use the iPod and XM Radio functions  
simultaneously using the multi-room feature.  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
volume.  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
ꢀ
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE  
volume control in Multi-Room Setup on page 65.  
SETUP  
RETURN  
4
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
5
When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-84TXSi  
return to the main room controls.  
ꢁ
STANDBY/ON  
You can also press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/  
OFF button on the front panel to switch off all output to  
the sub room(s).  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
5
PHASE  
CONTROL  
MCACC  
POSITION  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT  
HOME  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
Multi-room remote controls  
The following table shows the possible multi-room  
remote controls:  
Button  
What it does  
1
Press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/OFF button  
Selects the sub room you want to control,  
shown in the display as RCV/RM2 (ZONE/  
ROOM2) or RCV/RM3 (ZONE/ROOM3).  
SHIFT+  
RECEIVER  
on the front panel.  
Each press selects a multi-room option:  
• ROOM 2 ON – Selects your primary (ROOM 2) sub  
room  
Switches on/off power in the currently selected  
sub room.  
ꢁ
• ROOM 2&3 ON – Select both sub rooms  
Use to select the input source in the currently  
selected sub room.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
• ROOM 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ROOM 3)  
sub room  
Use to select the input source directly (this may  
not work for some functions) in the currently  
selected sub room.  
Input  
source  
buttons  
• Off – Switches the multi-room feature off  
The MULTI ROOM indicator lights when the multi-room  
control has been switched on  
Use to set the listening volume in the currently  
selected sub room (ZONE/ROOM2 only).  
VOL +/–  
1
2
Press CONTROL to select the sub room(s) you want.  
If you selected ROOM 2&3 ON above, you can toggle  
between ROOM 2 and ROOM 3.  
2
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any  
operations for the sub room are done while ZONE  
Connecting an IR receiver  
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or  
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub room remote  
control in another room, you can use an optional IR  
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your  
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of  
and your selected sub room(s) show in the display. If  
this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the  
main room only.  
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source  
for the room you have selected.  
For example, ROOM 2 CD-R sends the source connected  
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ROOM 2) sub room.  
6
this receiver.  
Note  
1 Note that when recording, this also selects the RECOUT input source. See Making an audio or a video recording on page 67 for more on this.  
2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub room(s) continue to show in the display.  
3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one room also changes the station in the other room.  
Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.  
4 The volume levels of the main and sub rooms are independent.  
5 • You won’t be able to switch the main room off completely unless you’ve switched off the multi-room control first.  
• If you don’t plan to use the multi-room feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.  
6 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.  
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.  
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
12V  
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the MULTI-ROOM  
TRIGGER  
& SOURCE IR IN (MAIN ROOM) jack on the rear of this  
receiver.  
If you also plan to use a separate IR receiver in the sub  
room, connect this to the ROOM2(ZONE2) jack. This will  
allow you to use the sub room remote control as  
explained in (VSX-84TXSi only) Sub remote control unit on  
page 26.  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
AM  
S400  
IN1  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-R  
R
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
OUT2  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
(
)
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
(
DVR/  
Closet or shelving unit  
•
Connect the 12V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to  
Non-Pioneer  
IR  
component  
the 12V trigger of another component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
IN  
Pioneer  
CONTROL  
component  
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V / 50 mA.  
IN  
OUT  
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch  
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on  
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on  
page 63.  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
FM UNBAL 7  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
&
S
O
URCE  
&
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
/
R
E
C
SEL  
R
IN1  
FRONT  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MONIT  
OUT  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2  
(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
L
CENTER  
OUT2  
SUB  
W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
IN2  
SUR-  
HDMI  
IN1  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
IN  
(SAT)  
1
ROUND  
BACK  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
OUT  
HDMI  
N1  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
IN  
(Single)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
1
2
1
OUT  
Y
DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
R
1
IN  
(DVR/  
3
L
2
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO  
/
SPEAKERS  
A
IN  
(CD-R)  
1
4
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
4
SUB  
W.  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
IN  
OUT  
PR  
2
1
1
2
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
IN  
IN  
3
VCR  
1
LD)  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
(CD)  
2
R
L
L
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
IN  
R
SURROUND  
BACK  
RS-232C  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
XM  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
Using this receiver with a Pioneer  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L
SURROUND  
BACK  
plasma display  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an  
IR receiver  
1
SR+ cable to connect it to this unit and take advantage  
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE IR OUT jack on the rear of this  
receiver to link it to the IR receiver.  
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for  
the type of cable necessary for the connection.  
of various convenient features, such as automatic video  
input switching of the plasma display when the input is  
2
changed.  
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR  
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor on page 76 to connect to the  
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.  
CONTROL  
OUT  
Pioneer plasma  
display  
Switching components on and off using  
the 12 volt trigger  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
R
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
S400  
(AUDIO)  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
You can connect components in your system (such as a  
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on  
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input  
function. However, you must specify which input  
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup  
menu on page 63. Note that this will only work with  
components that have a standby mode.  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
C
R
L
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
P
B
PB  
IN  
4
NA-  
SUB W.  
CENTER  
P
R
P
R
OUT  
2
SUR-  
DVR/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
R
R
L
L
OUT  
P
B
PB  
DVR/  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
P
R
P
R
IN  
CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
3
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Note  
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for  
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).  
2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Important  
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer  
plasma display  
• If you connect to a Pioneer plasma display using an  
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control  
at the plasma display remote sensor to control the  
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the  
receiver using the remote control if you switch the  
plasma display off.  
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of  
features become available to make using this receiver  
with your Pioneer plasma display even easier. These  
features include:  
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,  
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.  
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need  
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input  
Setup menu on page 63 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer  
plasma displays on page 65 for detailed instructions.  
• On-screen volume display.  
• On-screen display of listening mode.  
•
Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the  
• Automatic video input switching on the plasma  
display.  
CONTROL IN jack of this receiver with the CONTROL  
OUT jack of your plasma display.  
• Automatic volume muting on the plasma display.  
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on  
page 65 for more on setting up the receiver.  
Important  
• The additional SR+ features do not work when the  
iPod or XM Radio functions are selected.  
VIDEO  
INPUT 1  
VIDEO  
INPUT 2  
Pioneer plasma  
display  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
DVD player  
Satellite receiver, etc  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
RETURN  
ENTER  
SETUP  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
ꢀ
DVD/LD  
AUDIO IN  
SAT  
AUDIO IN  
DVR1  
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-84TXSi  
1
Make sure that the plasma display and this receiver  
ꢁ
STANDBY/ON  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
are switched on and that they are connected with the  
SR+ cable.  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
MCACC  
POSITION  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT  
HOME  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display  
above for more on connecting these components.  
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to  
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input  
Setup menu on page 63.  
This receiver  
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should  
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a  
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For  
each component, connect the video output directly to the  
plasma display, and just connect the audio (analog and/  
or digital) to this receiver.  
2
To switch SR+ mode on/off, press RECEIVER, then  
the SR+ button.  
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.  
• The automatic volume muting feature is enabled  
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays  
on page 65.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-  
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on  
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the  
Advanced MCACC application for more information.  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC  
output  
If you use the Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
page 39) to measure the reverb characteristics of your  
listening room, you can check the results graphically  
using a computer connected to this receiver. Use a  
commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect the RS-  
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on  
the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be cross  
type, female–female).  
RS-232C  
The software to output the results is available from the  
support area of the Pioneer website (http://  
www.pioneerelectronics.com/pna/ci/codes/  
0,,2076_262707270,00.html). Instructions for using the  
software are also available here. If you have any  
questions regarding, please contact the Customer  
Support Division of Pioneer.  
Personal computer  
Advanced MCACC output using your PC  
Before continuing, make sure you have completed steps  
1–3 in Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 39.  
Note that transmission data is erased when the receiver  
is turned off.  
Please make sure your system meets the following  
requirements:  
®
®
• Operating system must be Windows XP, Windows  
®
®
2000, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 98  
1
Select ‘Reverb Output PC’ and press ENTER.  
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the  
MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.  
®
Second Edition, or Windows NT 4.0 (Service pack 6).  
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD  
K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of  
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a  
minimum resolution of 800x600.  
3e.EQ Professional  
3e3.Reverb Output PC  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
1.Reverb Measurement  
2.Reverb View  
3.Reverb Output PC  
4.Advanced EQ Setup  
1
Start the MCACC  
application on your PC  
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for  
graphical output. Refer to the operating instructions  
and/or the PC manufacturer for more information on  
making the proper port settings.  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Cancel  
2
Start the MCACC application on your computer.  
• System must have internet access.  
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It  
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to  
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on  
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the  
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off  
the receiver, you might want to save the information on  
your PC after measurement.  
•
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on  
the rear panel of the receiver.  
Make sure that the receiver and all connected  
components are switched off and disconnected from the  
1
power outlet when you do this.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You’ll be taken to the Advanced EQ Setup. Depending on  
the results, you may want to continue with the Advanced  
EQ setup (see Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
on page 41 for more on this). You can also simply press  
RETURN again to exit the Professional Acoustic  
Calibration EQ setup.  
Note  
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 41 (measure-  
ment data is cleared if you switch off the power).  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
09  
Chapter 9:  
Other Settings  
4
Select the input function that you want to set up.  
The default names correspond with the names next to the  
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD/LD or VIDEO  
1/GAME 1) which, in turn, correspond with the names  
on the remote control.  
The Input Setup menu  
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu  
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to  
the default settings (see Input function default and  
possible settings below). In this case, you need to tell the  
receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal  
so the buttons on the remote correspond to the  
components you’ve connected.  
6.Input Setup  
Input  
(1/2)  
6.Input Setup  
(
(2/2)  
DVD  
Back)  
TV Game  
Input Name Default  
M.ROOM  
ROOM  
Input-1  
Digital In  
[
[
[
[
COAX-1  
Input-2  
Comp-2  
Input-1  
]
]
]
]
HDMI Input  
Component In  
S-Video In  
i.LINK In  
12V Trigger1  
12V Trigger2  
PDP In (SR+)  
[
[
[
]
]
]
2
[
DV-S969A  
Next  
]
(
)
ꢀ:Finish  
ENTER  
:
Next  
ꢀ:Finish  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
5
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your  
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TOP MENU ì  
TUNE  
component.  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical  
output, you will need to change the DVD/LD input  
function’s Digital In setting from COAX 1 (default) to the  
optical input you’ve connected it to.The numbering  
(OPT1–4) corresponds with the numbers beside the  
inputs on the back of the receiver.  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
SELECT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use the ꢁ RECEIVER button to switch on.  
• If you change the setting to an input that has been  
previously assigned to another function (for example,  
SAT) then the setting for that function will  
automatically be switched off.  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
the SETUP button.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
• If you used component video cords to connect your  
component you must tell the receiver which input  
you connected it to, or else you may see the S-video  
or composite video input instead of the component  
1
3
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.  
video signal.  
• If you have more than one iLINK component  
connected, you can assign each one to a different  
input function in the same way (to check your  
settings after doing so, see Checking the i.LINK  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
6.Input Setup  
Input  
(1/2)  
DVD  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
Digital In  
[
[
[
[
COAX-1  
Input-2  
Comp-2  
Input-1  
]
]
]
]
HDMI Input  
Component In  
S-Video In  
i.LINK In  
7.Other Setup  
2
[
DV-S969A  
Next  
]
inputs on page 52).  
(
)
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
6
When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to  
the next screen.  
The second screen of the Input setup has three optional  
settings:  
• Input name – You can choose to rename the input  
function for easier identification. Select Rename to  
do so, or Default to return to the system default.  
Note  
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the AV options on page 66),  
you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
2 • If you assign i.LINK-equipped components to an input (for example DVD/LD), you will be able to select both audio and video signals from i.LINK-  
equipped components using the corresponding input source button (or the INPUT SELECT button / INPUT SELECTOR dial). Assigning i.LINK sources also  
allows you to keeps the sound settings you’ve made for other input functions.  
• An i.LINK-equipped video component should be assigned to the input function to which you have connected the video signal from the component.  
• If you assign an i.LINK input to a certain function (for example DVD/LD) then any digital inputs previously assigned to that function will automatically  
be set to i.LINK (not assigned).  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
09  
• 12V Trigger 1 / 2 – After connecting a component to  
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components  
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 60), select  
M. ROOM, ROOM2, ROOM3 or OFF for the  
corresponding trigger setting to switch it on  
automatically along with the (main or sub) room  
specified.  
The Other Setup menu  
The Other Setup menu is where you can make  
customized settings to reflect how you are using the  
receiver.  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
receiver from a plasma display, select the display  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
1
TUNE  
input to which you’ve connected the receiver.  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
RETURN  
ENTER  
SETUP  
7
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
ꢀ
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
Input function default and possible settings  
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally  
correspond to the name of one of the input source  
functions. If you have connected components to this  
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults  
below, see The Input Setup menu above to tell the  
receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (ì) indicate  
DVR1  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use the ꢁ RECEIVER button to switch on.  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
the SETUP button.  
possible assignments.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
Input Terminals  
Digital i.LINK HDMI  
Input  
source  
Component S-Video  
DVD/LD  
TV  
COAX 1  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
IN 1  
IN 2  
3
Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.  
ì
ì
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
7.Other Setup  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
SAT  
OPT 1  
OPT 2  
OPT 3  
ì
ì
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
DVR/VCR1  
DVR/VCR2  
VIDEO/GAME1  
VIDEO/GAME2  
HDMI 1  
ì
(Fixed)  
(Fixed)  
ì
7.Other Setup  
ì
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
ì
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
(Fixed)  
ì
ì
(Fixed)  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
ì
(HDMI-1  
)
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
ì
ì
ì
ì
(HDMI-2)  
• Multi Room Setup – Specify your volume setting for  
a multi-room setup (see Multi-Room Setup below).  
(HDMI-3  
)
• SR+ Setup – Specify how you want to control your  
Pioneer plasma display (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer  
plasma displays below).  
HDMI 4  
(VSX-84TXSi )  
ì
ì
(
HDMI-4)  
USB  
• OSD Adjustment – Adjust the position of the on-  
screen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment  
below).  
XM  
CD  
COAX 2  
OPT 4  
ì
ì
• iLINK Check (VSX-84TXSi only) – Check which i.LINK-  
equipped components you have connected, and  
which input function they are assigned to (Checking  
the i.LINK inputs on page 52).  
CD-R/TAPE/MD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH IN  
iPod  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
iLINK  
Note  
1 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the  
setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 60). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the  
plasma display’s remote sensor after making this connection.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
09  
2
3
Select the ‘PDP Volume Control’ setting you want.  
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the  
plasma display.  
Multi-Room Setup  
• Default setting: Variable  
If you’ve made multi-room connections (see Multi-room  
listening on page 57) you may need to specify your  
volume setting.  
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the  
inputs that use the plasma display (DVD/LD, for  
example), the volume on the plasma display is muted  
so only sound from the receiver is heard.  
1
Select ‘Multi-Room Setup’ from the System  
Setup menu.  
Assign any input source connected to the plasma  
display to the corresponding input number.  
This matches the receiver’s input source with a  
numbered video input on the plasma display. For  
example, assign DVD/LD to input-2 if you have  
connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on  
the plasma display.  
7.Other Setup  
7a.Multi Room Setup  
Volume Level  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
Variable  
Be careful of loud  
volume when "FIXED"  
is selected.  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
• The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input  
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your  
plasma display.  
1
2
Select the volume level setting.  
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a  
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is  
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be  
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.  
7b.SR+ Setup  
PDP Volume Control  
[
OFF  
]
Monitor Out Connect  
OFF  
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully  
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX  
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that  
receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not  
available if the surround back system setting is set to  
Multi Room & Source.)  
ꢀ:Finish  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this  
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is  
quite low in the sub room at first and then experiment to  
find the correct level.  
OSD Adjustment  
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems  
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
1
Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
menu.  
7.Other Setup  
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays  
Make the following settings if you have connected a  
Pioneer plasma display to this receiver using an SR+  
cable. Note that the number of function settings available  
will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected.  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
X=0  
,
Y=0  
[
Finish  
]
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Return  
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display  
on page 60 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer  
plasma display on page 61.  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to move the display field around  
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.  
3
When you're finished, press ENTER  
.
1
Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
7.Other Setup  
7b.SR+ Setup  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
PDP Volume Control  
OFF  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
Monitor Out Connect  
OFF  
[
]
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
Note  
1 If you selected MR&S in the Surround back speaker setting on page 36, you won’t be able to change the volume level.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
Chapter 10  
Using other functions  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Setting the AV options  
Center  
Adjusts the center image to create a  
wider stereo effect with vocals.  
Adjust the effect from 0 (all center  
channel sent to front right and left  
speakers) to 10 (center channel sent  
to the center speaker only).  
0 to 10  
Default: 3  
Imageb  
There are a number of additional sound and picture  
settings you can make using the AV Parameter menu.  
The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.  
(Applicable  
only when  
usingacenter  
speaker)  
Important  
Effect  
Sets the effect level for the currently  
selected Advanced Surround mode  
(each mode can be set separately).  
10 to 90  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AV  
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current  
source, settings and status of the receiver.  
High Bit /  
High  
Sampling  
Creates a wider dynamic range with  
digital sources like CDs or DVDs.  
OFF  
ON  
1
2
Press AV PARAMETER  
.
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the setting you want to adjust.  
Digital  
Noise  
Reduction  
(DNR)  
May improve the quality of sound in a  
noisy source (for example, cassette  
or video tape with lots of background  
noise) when switched on.  
OFF  
ON  
Depending on the current status / mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
3
Use ꢂ/ꢃ to set it as necessary.  
Dual Mono Specifies how dual mono encoded  
Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks  
should be played. Dual mono is not  
widely used, but is sometimes  
CH1 – Channel  
1 is heard only  
See the table below for the options available for each  
setting.  
CH2 – Channel  
2 is heard only  
necessary when two languages need  
to be sent to separate channels.  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
CH1 CH2 –  
Both channels  
heard from  
front speakers  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Midnight  
Allows you to hear effective surround MID/LDN OFF  
sound of movies at low volumes.  
MIDNIGHT ON  
Used to get good bass and treble  
from music sources at low volumes.  
Dynamic  
Range  
Control  
Specifies the amount of dynamic  
range adjustment to Dolby Digital  
and DTS movie soundtracks (you  
may want to use this when listening  
to surround sound at low volumes).  
OFF  
MAX  
MID  
Loudness  
LOUDNESS ON  
BYPASS  
ON  
(DRC)  
Tone  
control  
Applies the treble and bass tone  
controls to a source, or bypasses  
them completely.  
Dialog  
Enhance-  
menta  
Localizes dialog in the center  
channel to make it stand out from  
other background sounds in a TV or  
movie soundtrack.  
OFF  
Bass  
Adjusts the amount of bass.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
default: 0 (dB)  
ON  
Treble  
Adjusts the amount of treble.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
default: 0 (dB)  
SACD Gainc  
Brings out detail in SACDs by  
maximizing the dynamic range  
(during digital processing).  
0 to 6 (dB)  
default: 0 (dB)  
Center  
Widtha  
(Applicable  
only when  
usingacenter  
speaker)  
Provides a better blend of the front  
speakers by spreading the center  
channel between the front right and  
left speakers, making it sound wider  
(higher settings) or narrower (lower  
settings).  
0 to 7  
Default: 3  
Sound  
Delay  
Some monitors have a slight delay  
when showing video, so the  
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync 1 second = 30  
with the picture. By adding a bit of  
delay, you can adjust the sound to  
match the presentation of the video.  
0.0 to 6.0  
(frames)  
frames (NTSC)  
Dimensionb  
Adjusts the depth of the surround  
sound balance from front to back,  
making the sound more distant  
(minus settings), or more forward  
(positive settings).  
–3 to +3  
Default: 0  
HDMId  
Specifies the routing of the HDMI  
audio signal out of this receiver (amp)  
or through to a TV or plasma display.  
AMP  
THROUGH  
Digital  
Video  
Conversion  
Converts video signals for output  
from the MONITOR OUT jacks for all  
video types.  
ON  
Panoramab  
Extends the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for a  
‘wraparound’ effect.  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
Brightness Adjusts the overall brightness.  
–10 to +10  
default: 0  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
For more information about video connections, see  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video  
sources on page 13.  
Setting  
Contrast  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Adjusts the contrast between light  
and dark.  
–10 to +10  
Default: 0  
Hue  
Adjusts the red/green balance.  
–10 to +10  
Default: 0  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
Resolutione  
Specifies the output resolution of the  
video signal (select this according to  
the resolution of your monitor and  
the disc you wish to watch).  
PURE  
480p  
720p  
1080i  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
Aspect  
Specifies the aspect ratio of an  
analog video signal (if the image  
doesn’t match your monitor type,  
cropping occurs as indicated in  
parentheses at left).  
THROUGH  
(none)  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).  
4:3 (left/right)  
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SELECT to select the  
input signal corresponding to the source component  
(see Choosing the input signal on page 30 for more  
on this).  
ZOOM  
(top/bottom)  
a.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
mode (also available with 2Pro Logic II 5.1 channel sound).  
b.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode.  
c.You shouldn't have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but  
if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.  
d. When THROUGH is selected, the Resolution is automatically set to  
PURE (regardless of the setting).  
e.There are cases where (depending on the resolution of the video signal  
and your monitor) you may not be able to see a picture after selecting a  
resolution setting. If this happens, select a different resolution setting.  
Note that analog input signals are unaffected when using the 720p and  
1080i resolution settings.  
2
Prepare the source you want to record.  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.  
3
Prepare the recorder.  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording  
device and set the recording levels.  
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if  
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set  
the audio recording level automatically—check the  
component's instruction manual if you're unsure.  
Making an audio or a video recording  
4
Start recording, then start playback of the source  
You can make an audio or a video recording from the  
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source  
component.  
1
Playing a different source when recording  
Using this receiver, it’s possible to listen to a different  
source than the one you’re recording.  
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).  
Keep in mind you can't make a digital recording from an  
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the  
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in  
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 10 for more on connections).  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
Since the video converter is not available when making  
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use  
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder  
as you used to connect your video source (the one you  
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must  
connect your recorder using S-video if your source has  
also been connected using S-video.  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
1
During recording, press the REC SELECT CONTROL  
button on the front panel until RECOUT shows in the  
2
display.  
2
While RECOUT shows in the display, use the  
INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source you want  
to record.  
The default, RECOUT SOURCE, records the source you’re  
currently listening to (as in Making an audio or a video  
recording above).  
Note  
1 • The receiver's volume, AV parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.  
2 If RECOUT does not appear in the display, you may have to switch ROOM 2 off by pressing MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/OFF and selecting either  
ROOM 3 or off (the MULTI-ROOM indicator disappears). See Using the multi-room controls on page 59 for more on this.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
• Note that the setting you make here is stored in  
memory, even if you switch off the receiver, so if you  
want to record a different input source later, you  
must do so with REC SELECT, or by selecting  
RECOUT SOURCE.  
Using the sleep timer  
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a  
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without  
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use  
the remote control to set the sleep timer.  
3
After RECOUT disappears from the display, select  
the input source you want to listen to.  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
This will be heard from the main system without affecting  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
1
your recording.  
DACCESS  
CLASS  
Tip  
•
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.  
• If you have a digital recorder connected to the  
DIGITAL OUT1 (ROOM3) digital output and ROOM  
3 is switched on (see Using the multi-room controls  
on page 59), you can also select a different input  
source for this output while ROOM 3 shows in the  
display.  
30 min  
Off  
60 min  
90 min  
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time  
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will  
cycle through the sleep options again.  
4
Reducing the level of an analog signal  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog  
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find  
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can  
Dimming the display  
You can choose between four brightness levels for the  
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources,  
the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.  
2
hear distortion in the sound.  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
•
Press ANALOG ATT to switch the input attenuator  
•
Press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness  
on or off.  
of the front panel display.  
Watching video and audio sources  
independently  
Switching the speaker impedance  
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,  
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you  
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating.  
You can listen to a sound source and select a different  
video source on your TV.  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
•
With the receiver in standby, press ꢁ STANDBY/  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button.  
Each time you do this, you switch between the  
impedance settings:  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
DISC  
+
10  
• SP 6 OHM – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 6 Ω.  
•
While listening to a source, press VIDEO SEL (VIDEO  
SELECT) to select the video source you want to watch.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through the possible video  
sources. You can select DVD, TV, SAT, DVR1, DVR2,  
• SP 8 OHM – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 8 Ω or more.  
3
VIDEO1, VIDEO2 or OFF (no video signal).  
Note  
1 • Note that switching the ROOM 2 input source (as explained in Multi-room listening on page 57) also changes the RECOUT input source.  
• If RECOUT SOURCE is selected, changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording.  
2 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.  
3 Note that this feature will not work with video sources assigned to either of the HDMI video inputs.  
4 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
Default system settings  
Checking your system settings  
Setting  
Default  
Use the status display screen to check your current  
settings for features such as surround back channel  
processing and your current MCACC preset.  
HDMI Audio  
Amp  
Digital Video Conversion  
Speakers  
On  
A
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
DISP  
CH  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
Surround Back System  
Normal (SBch)  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALLx2  
YES  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
Speaker System  
Front  
Center  
Surr.  
SB  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
1
Press STATUS to check the system settings.  
These appear on both the OSD and the front panel  
1
display.  
SW  
STATUS  
Crossover  
80 Hz  
96kHz STEREO  
Signal Select  
:
AUTO  
SBch Processin : OFF  
Bass Peak Level  
X-Curve  
OFF  
Retriever  
: ON  
: OFF  
Video Select  
MCACC Position : M1  
Room2/REC SEL : SOURCE  
OFF  
Room3  
: SOURCE  
THX Audio Setting  
Inputs  
0–1ft.  
The front panel display shows each of the following  
settings for two seconds each:  
See Input function default and possible settings on page 64.  
Input source  
Signal select  
Sound Retriever  
MCACC Position  
Room 3  
Listening mode  
Multi Room  
Surround Back Processing  
Video Select  
Room 2 Volume Type  
Room 2 Volume  
SR+  
Variable  
-60  
Room 2 / REC SEL  
SR+ Control On/Off  
SR+ Volume Control On/Off  
Monitor Out  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to  
switch off the display.  
DSP  
Resetting the system  
MCACC Position Memory  
M1: MEMORY 1  
ON  
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to  
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.  
Surround back channel  
Processing  
1
Switch the receiver into standby.  
Phase Control  
Sound Retriever  
Sound Delay  
Dual Mono  
DRC  
On  
Off  
2
While holding down the front panel AV  
PARAMETER button, press and hold  
for about three seconds.  
The display shows RESET?.  
ꢁ
STANDBY/ON  
0 frame  
CH1  
OFF  
0 dB  
OFF  
90  
3
Press the front panel ENTER button.  
The display shows RESET OK?.  
SACD Gain  
Digital Safety  
4
Press SETUP to confirm.  
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver  
has been reset to the factory default settings.  
Effect Level  
7 ch Stereo  
Other modes  
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the  
receiver is unplugged.  
50  
Note  
1 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
Setting  
Default  
2PL II Music Options Center Width  
3
Dimension  
Panorama  
0
OFF  
3
Neo:6 Options  
All Inputs  
Center Image  
Listening Mode (2 ch) AUTO SURROUND  
Listening Mode (x ch) AUTO SURROUND  
Listening Mode (HP)  
STEREO  
See also Setting the AV options on page 66 for other default DSP  
settings.  
MCACC  
Channel level (M1–M6)  
0 dB  
10 ft  
ON  
Speaker Distance (M1–M6)  
Standing Wave  
(M1–M6)  
Standing Wave On/  
Off  
ATT  
0 dB  
0.0  
SWch Wide Trim  
All channels/bands  
EQ Data (M1–M6)  
0 dB  
0.0 dB  
EQ Wide Trim (M1–M6)  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
Chapter 11:  
Controlling the rest of your system  
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the first letter of the brand name  
of your component then press ENTER  
.
Setting the remote to control other  
components  
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P  
for Pioneer).  
Most components can be assigned to one of the input  
source buttons (such as DVD/LD or CD) using the  
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the  
remote.  
5
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the manufacturer’s name from  
the list then press ENTER  
.
6
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the proper code from the list,  
then try using this remote with your component.  
The code should start with the component type (for  
example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with  
However, there are cases where only certain functions  
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset  
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote  
control will not work for the model that you are using.  
2
the first one.  
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the  
component you want to control, you can still teach the  
remote individual commands from another remote  
control (see Programming signals from other remote  
controls below).  
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or  
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE ꢁ. If it doesn’t  
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there  
is one).  
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you  
can still teach the remote individual commands from  
another remote control (see Programming signals  
from other remote controls below).  
Note  
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing  
RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.  
7
If your component is controlled successfully, press  
ENTER to confirm.  
The remote LCD display shows OK.  
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote  
automatically exits the operation.  
Programming signals from other  
remote controls  
Selecting preset codes directly  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
If the preset code for your component is not available, or  
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you  
can program signals from the remote control of another  
component. This can also be used to program additional  
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
3
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
assigning a preset code.  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
DVR1  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select LEARNING then press ENTER.  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component  
you want to control (for example DVD or VIDEO 1).  
2
3
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select PRESET then press ENTER  
.
3
Press the input source button for the component  
Press the input source button for the component  
you want to control then press ENTER  
.
you want to control then press ENTER  
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want  
to control (for example DVD or VIDEO 1).  
.
4
PRES KEY shows in the LCD display.  
1
Note  
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod or XM RADIO buttons.  
2 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 487, 488, 489 or 493.  
• When using a Pioneer plasma display released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 637 or 660.  
The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).  
3
4 • You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod or XM RADIO buttons.  
• TV CONTROL buttons (TVꢁ,TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT SELECT) can only be learned after selecting TV CONT.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
4
Point the two remote controls towards each other  
7
Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of  
then press the button that will be doing the learning on  
this receiver’s remote control.  
seconds to exit and store the operation(s).  
PRES KEY starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready  
to accept a signal.  
Erasing one of the remote control  
button settings  
• The remote controls should be 1 to 2 inches apart.  
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and  
restores the button to the factory default.  
1 to 2 inches  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
5
Press the corresponding button on the other remote  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this  
receiver’s remote control.  
For example, if you want to learn the playback control  
signal, press and hold ꢃ briefly. The LCD display will  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select ERASE then press ENTER.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component  
corresponding to the button setting to be erased.  
1
show OK if the operation has been learned.  
3
Press the input source button corresponding to the  
If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the  
LCD will display ERROR briefly and then display PRES  
KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)  
button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,  
command to be erased then press ENTER  
The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.  
.
4
Press and hold the button to be erased for two  
seconds.  
2
until the LCD display shows OK.  
The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the  
button has been erased.  
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be  
3
learned from other remote controls. The buttons  
5
Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.  
available are shown below (with the exception of the TV  
controls, a combination of SHIFT and these buttons can  
also be learned):  
6
Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of  
seconds when you’re done.  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
Resetting the remote control presets  
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and  
programmed buttons.  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select RESET then press ENTER  
.
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
RESET flashes in the LCD display.  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
TV CONTROL  
INPUT  
3
Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds.  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
SELECT  
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
been erased.  
REC  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
MPX  
REC STOP MEMORY  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
RETURN  
ENTER  
SETUP  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
ꢀ
DISP  
CH  
Confirming preset codes  
TUNE  
TV CONTROL  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
PHOTO  
BAND  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned  
to an input source button.  
6
To program additional signals for the current  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
component repeat steps 4 and 5.  
To program signals for another component, exit and  
repeat steps 1 through 5.  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select READ ID then press ENTER.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source  
button you want to check.  
Note  
1 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.  
2 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.  
• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings below to erase a programmed button  
you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).  
3 Note that the number key decimal button (+10/D.ACCESS) may not be learned with some components.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
3
Press the button of the component for which you  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select DIRECT F then press ENTER.  
want to check the preset code, then press ENTER.  
The brand name and preset code appears in the display  
for three seconds.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the  
input source you want to control.  
3
Press the input source button for the component  
you want to control then press ENTER  
.
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to switch direct function ON or OFF then  
Renaming input source names  
press ENTER  
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.  
.
You can customize the names that appear on the remote  
LCD when you select an input source (for example, you  
could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD/DVR).  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
Multi Operation and System Off  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a  
series of up to 5 commands for the components in your  
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on  
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using  
only two buttons on the remote control.  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select RENAME then press ENTER.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the  
input source you want to rename.  
3
Press the input source button you want to rename  
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use  
one button to stop and switch off a series of components  
then press ENTER  
.
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select NAME EDT then press ENTER.  
2
in your system at the same time.  
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select  
NAME RST above.  
Programming a multi-operation or a  
shutdown sequence  
5
Edit the name of the input source in the remote  
control LCD, pressing ENTER when you’re finished.  
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to change the character and ꢂ/ꢃ to move  
forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight  
characters (the possible characters are listed below).  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
0123456789 \ / * + – [space]  
ꢀ
TUNE  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
BAND  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR1  
Direct function  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
ANALOG  
• Default setting: ON  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
.
You can use the direct function feature to control one  
component using the remote control while at the same  
time, using your receiver to playback a different  
component. This could let you, for example, use the  
remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver  
and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your  
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select MULTI OP or SYS OFF from the  
menu and press ENTER  
If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OP), the LCD on  
the remote prompts you for an input source button.  
.
If you selected System Off (SYSOFF), go to step 4.  
When direct function is on, any component you select  
(using the input source buttons) will be selected by both  
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct  
function off, you can operate the remote control without  
3
Press the input source button for the component  
that will start the multi-operation then press ENTER  
For example, if you want to start the sequence by  
switching on your DVD player, press DVD.  
.
1
affecting the receiver.  
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select CODE EDT then press ENTER.  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.  
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or  
shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
Note  
1 You can’t use direct function with the TV CONT function.  
2 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the  
remote to control other components on page 71 for more on this).  
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.  
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
5
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select a command in the sequence then  
Using multi operations  
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched  
on, or in standby.  
press ENTER  
.
If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST  
CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in  
the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
6
If necessary, press the input source button for the  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
component whose command you want to input.  
This is only necessary if the command is for a new  
component (input source).  
RECEIVER  
7
Select the button for the command you want to  
1
Press MULTI OPE.  
input.  
MULTI OP flashes in the display.  
The following remote control commands can be  
selected:  
2
Press an input source button that has been set up  
with a multi operation.  
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the  
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
Using System off  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
STEREO  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
XM RADIO  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
DVR1  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
TV CONTROL  
INPUT  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
RECEIVER  
SELECT  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
REC  
DTV INFO  
MUTE  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
1
Press MULTI OPE.  
TUNE  
MPX  
REC STOP MEMORY  
MULTI OP flashes in the display.  
ST  
ST  
DTV MENU  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
ꢀ
DISP  
CH  
TUNE  
TV CONTROL  
2
Press SOURCEꢁ.  
CATEGORY  
GUIDE  
PHOTO  
BAND  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
The command sequence you programmed will run, then  
all Pioneer components will switch off , followed by this  
receiver.  
1
• You don't need to program the receiver to switch on  
or off. This is done automatically.  
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:  
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown  
sequence (except DVD recorders);  
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source  
component selected in step 3;  
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the  
input function (selected in step 2) has video input  
terminals;  
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).  
8
Repeat steps 5–7 to program a sequence of up to  
five commands.  
9
When you’re finished, use ꢀ/ꢁ to select EDITEXIT  
from the menu and press ENTER  
.
You will return to the remote control SETUP menu. Select  
* EXIT * again to exit.  
Note  
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
Controls for TVs  
Controls for other components  
This remote control can control components after  
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the  
commands (see Setting the remote to control other  
components on page 71 for more on this). Use the input  
source buttons to select the component.  
This remote control can control these components after  
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the  
commands (see Setting the remote to control other  
components on page 71 for more on this). Use the input  
source buttons to select the component.  
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are  
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CONT  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the  
TV CONT button.  
Button (s) Function  
Components  
SOURCEꢁ Press to switch the component  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
between standby and on.  
Cassette deck  
Button(s) Function  
Components  
ꢇ
ꢆ
ꢅ
Press to return to the start of the  
current track or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
DVD/LD player  
TVꢁ  
Press to switch the component  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
Repeated presses skips to the start  
of previous tracks or chapters.  
assigned to the TV CONT  
button on or off.  
Press to advance to the start of the CD/MD/CD-R/  
INPUT  
SELECT  
Switches the TV input. (Not  
possible with all models.)  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
next track or chapter.  
DVD/LD player  
Repeated presses skips to the start  
of following tracks or chapters.  
TV CH +/– Selects channels.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
Pause playback or recording.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
TV VOL +/– Adjust the TV volume.  
SOURCEꢁ Switches the DTV on or off.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
Cassette deck  
DTV  
ꢃ
Start playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
Switches the TV or CATV between Cable TV/Satellite  
standby and on.  
TV/TV  
Cassette deck  
ꢈ
ꢉ
Switches the DTV on or off.  
DTV  
ꢉ
ꢈ
ꢄ
Hold down for fast forward  
playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
Press to get information on DTV  
programs.  
DTV  
ꢇ
ꢆ
ꢅ
Use to choose the BLUE  
commands on a DTV menu.  
DTV  
DTV  
DTV  
DTV  
DTV  
Cassette deck  
Hold down for fast reverse  
playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
Use to choose the YELLOW  
commands on a DTV menu.  
Cassette deck  
Use to choose the GREEN  
commands on a DTV menu.  
Stops playback.  
Starts recording.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
ꢄ
Use to choose the RED  
commands on a DTV menu.  
Cassette deck  
AUDIO / DISP Use to switch DTV audio tracks.  
ì REC  
(SHIFT+ꢃ)  
MD/CD-R/VCR/  
DVR player/  
Cassette deck  
SUBTITLE  
Use to return to the previously  
selected channel.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
DTV MENU Press to display the DTV menu.  
DTV  
REC STOP Stops recording.  
DVR player  
DVR player  
(SHIFT+ꢄ)  
GUIDE  
Use as the GUIDE button for  
navigating.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
JUKEBOX Switches to the Jukebox feature.  
(SHIFT+ꢆ)  
RETURN  
Use to select RETURN or EXIT.  
DTV  
Number  
buttons  
Directly access tracks on a  
program source.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/LD player  
Number  
buttons  
Use to select a specific TV  
channel.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
Use the number buttons to  
navigate the on-screen display.  
DVD/DVR player  
+10 button Use to add a decimal point when DTV  
selecting a specific TV channel.  
+10 button Selects tracks higher than 10. (For CD/MD/CD-R/  
ENTER/  
DISC  
Use to enter a channel.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
example, press +10 then 3 to  
VCR/LD player  
select track 13.)  
MENU  
Select different menus from the  
DTV functions.  
DTV  
ENTER/  
DISC  
Chooses the disc.  
Multiple CD  
player  
Select the menu screen.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
Use as the ENTER button.  
VCR/DVD  
Displays the setup screen for DVR DVR player  
players.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ Press to select or adjust and  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV/DTV  
& ENTER  
navigate items on the menu  
screen.  
Changes sides of the LD.  
LD player  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
Button (s) Function  
Components  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor  
TOP MENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a DVD/DVR player  
DVD player.  
MENU  
Displays menus concerning the  
current DVD or DVR you are using.  
DVD/DVR player  
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks  
which can be used to link components together so that  
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.  
When you use a remote control, the control signal is  
ꢀ
Pauses the tape.  
Stops the tape.  
Starts playback.  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
ꢁ
1
ENTER  
ꢂ/ꢃ  
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.  
Fast rewinds/fast forwards the  
tape.  
Important  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ Navigates DVD menu/options.  
DVD/DVR player  
DVD/DVR player  
& ENTER  
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you  
also have at least one set of analog audio or video jacks  
connected to another component for grounding  
purposes.  
GUIDE  
Press to access the DVD player  
setup screen.  
CH +/–  
Selects channels.  
VCR/DVD/DVR  
player  
1
Decide which component you want to use the  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
Changes the audio language or  
channel.  
DVD/DVR player  
remote sensor of.  
When you want to control any component in the chain,  
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the  
corresponding remote control.  
Displays/changes the subtitles on DVD/DVR player  
multilingual DVDs.  
SHIFT  
+SUBTITLE  
Switches to the VCR controls when VCR/DVD/DVR  
using a VCR/DVD/HDD recorder.  
player  
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component  
HDD  
(SHIFT +  
CH–)  
Switches to the hard disk controls DVR player  
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.  
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
DVD(SHIFT Switches to the DVD controls  
DVR player  
+ CH+)  
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
ANTENNA  
R
P
IN  
&
SOURCE  
L
2(ZONE2)  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
IN  
R
L
FR  
FL  
iPod  
IN  
SUB W.  
CENTER  
SUR-  
ROUND  
R
R
L
232C  
SURRND  
BACK  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
L
CONTROL  
UDIO  
3
Continue the chain in the same way for as many  
components as you have.  
Note  
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 71.  
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won't be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.  
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 60 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma display.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Chapter 12:  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.  
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.  
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If  
off or the Phase Control indicator so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.  
blinks.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
independent service company.  
During loud playback the power • Turn down the volume.  
suddenly switches off. • Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 37.  
• Try switching on the digital safety feature (put the receiver into standby, hold down the SETUP button on  
the front panel and press ꢁ STANDBY/ON to switch between SAFETY 1 (medium effect), SAFETY 2 (more  
effect) and SAFETY OFF. If the power switches off even with SAFETY 2 switched on, turn down the volume.  
The unit does not respond when • Try switching the receiver off then back on again.  
the buttons are pressed.  
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.  
AMP ERR blinks in the display,  
then the power automatically  
switches off. The MCACC blinks  
and the power does not turn on.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer  
authorized independent service company for help.  
FAN STOP blinks in the display, • Something is obstructing the fan. Remove the obstruction and try switching the receiver back on. If the  
then the power automatically  
switches off.  
fan is still not working, or you can't remove the object, unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer  
authorized independent service company.  
• The fan is malfunctioning. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent  
service company.  
OVERHEAT blinks in the display • Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on. Check Ventilation on  
then the power automatically  
switches off.  
page 6 for information on improving heat dispersal.  
The receiver suddenly switches • The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
off or DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING blinks in the  
display.  
independent service company.  
No sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input source is selected.  
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).  
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.  
No sound output from the front • Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.  
speakers. • Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SELECT). Note that when PCM is selected,  
you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.  
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 10).  
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see  
center speakers.  
Listening in surround sound on page 27).  
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 43).  
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 44).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
No sound from surround back  
speakers.  
• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 43).  
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on  
page 30.  
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround  
back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case,  
set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 30).  
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set to  
SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 27).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 17). If only one surround back  
speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.  
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.  
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 43).  
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other  
speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 43)  
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to  
Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 43).  
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to –80 dB, or a very quiet setting (see Bass Peak Level on page 45).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 44).  
No sound from one speaker.  
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 44).  
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 43).  
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you  
may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 27).  
Sound is produced from analog • Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 30).  
components, but not from digital • Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to  
ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).  
(see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.  
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.  
output when Dolby Digital/DTS  
software is played back.  
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
No sound when using the System • If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.  
Setup or Status menu.  
• If sound is muted in the sub room (ROOM 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be  
For FM broadcasts  
selected automatically, or there is • Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.  
considerable noise in radio  
broadcasts.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 20).  
For AM broadcasts  
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 20).  
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc.  
Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.  
A multichannel DVD source  
appears to be downmixed to 2  
channels during playback.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
on page 54).  
Noise is output when scanning a • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information,  
DTS CD.  
making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
When playing a DTS format LD  
there is audible noise on the  
soundtrack.  
• Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 30).  
Can't record audio.  
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog  
source.  
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.  
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting analog  
audio sources on page 16).  
Recorded audio is different from • The RECOUT source is set to an input source other than the source you’re listening to. Select RECOUT  
the current source, or inaudible. SOURCE to record the current input source (see Playing a different source when recording on page 67).  
Subwoofer output is very low.  
• To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker  
Setting on page 43).  
Everything seems to be set up  
correctly, but the playback sound  
is odd.  
• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are  
matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
The PHASE CONTROL feature  
•If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to  
doesn’t seem to have an audible the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on  
effect.  
the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).  
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 45).  
Noise or hum can be heard even • Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not  
when there is no sound being  
input.  
causing interference.  
There seems to be a time lag  
between the speakers and the  
output of the subwoofer.  
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 to set up your system again using  
MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).  
The maximum volume available • This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 44 have been adjusted, the maximum  
(shown in the front panel display) volume will change accordingly.  
is lower than the +12dB  
maximum.  
Video  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No image is output when an  
input is selected.  
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 13).  
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is  
switched off (in Setting the AV options on page 66), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same  
type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component or S-video cables  
(see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
• A separate video source has been selected using VIDEO SELECT (see Watching video and audio sources  
independently on page 68).  
• Check the video output settings of the source component.  
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.  
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting  
this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the AV options on page 66) and/or the resolution settings on  
your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the AV options  
on page 66) OFF.  
Can’t record video.  
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.  
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is  
used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Settings  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Auto MCACC Setup  
continually shows an error.  
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you  
will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 43).  
After using the Auto MCACC  
Setup, the speaker size setting is  
incorrect.  
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch  
off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.  
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.  
Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 43, and use the ALL (Keep SPsetting)  
option for the Auto Mode in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 34 if this is a recurring problem.  
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker  
Distance setting (page 38)  
properly.  
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are  
matched up properly).  
The display shows KEY LOCK  
ON when you try to make  
settings.  
• With the receiver in standby, press ꢁ STANDBY/ON while holding down the MULTI-ROOM&SOURCE  
CONTROL button to disable the key lock.  
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.  
erased.  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The EQ response displayed in the • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the Auto  
graphical output following  
calibration does not appear  
entirely flat.  
MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.  
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.  
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.  
EQ adjustments made using the • Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in  
Manual MCACC setup on  
page 37 do not appear to change  
the graphical output.  
the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to  
overall system calibration.  
Lower frequency response  
curves do not seem to have been  
calibrated for SMALL speakers.  
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that  
have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.  
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is  
output for display.  
Graphical output data seems to • If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.  
have disappeared.  
Display  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
After making an adjustment the • Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
display goes off.  
You can't get DIGITAL to display • Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input  
when using the SIGNAL SELECT Setup menu on page 63).  
button.  
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.  
The Dolby/DTS indicator doesn't • These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.  
light when playing Dolby/DTS  
software.  
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.  
When playing a DVD-Audio disc, • This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of  
the DVD player display shows  
96 kHz. However, the receiver’s  
display does not.  
the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 30).  
source, the display doesn't show  
96 kHz.  
When playing Dolby Digital or  
DTS sources, the receiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 30).  
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.  
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.  
When playing certain discs, none • The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio  
of the receiver’s format  
indicators light.  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
When playing a disc, the  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 30).  
2PL II or Neo:6 indicator lights • If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a  
on the receiver.  
malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.  
During playback of a Surround  
•The source may be Dolby Surround EX / DTS ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1  
EX or DTS ES source on the SBch compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 30) then switch to the  
AUTO setting, the EX and ES  
indicators don’t light, or the  
signal is not properly processed.  
THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 27).  
During playback of DVD-Audio, •This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.  
the display shows PCM.  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Cannot be remote controlled.  
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 6).  
• Be sure to operate within 23 feet and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Operating  
range of remote control unit on page 22).  
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.  
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.  
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s  
sensor on page 76).  
Other components can't be  
operated with the system remote.  
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.  
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.  
The SR cable is connected, but  
the connected components can’t plasma display on page 60).  
be operated with the remote.  
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a Pioneer  
• Make sure that there is an analog connection between the units. This is necessary for the SR feature to  
work.  
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment.  
i.LINK interface  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output.  
• Check that the source player is compatible with i.LINK audio.  
• Check the output settings of the source player.  
• Make sure that i.LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SELECT button (see Choosing the input  
signal on page 30).  
The i.LINK indicator does not  
light up even when an i.LINK-  
equipped component is selected.  
• Make sure that i.LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SELECT button (see Choosing the input  
signal on page 30).  
• Check the i.LINK connections; use an i.LINK cable of less than 11 feet (3.5 m).  
• Check that the source components conforms to the i.LINK Audio format.  
• Make sure that all components connected between the receiver and the source are switched on.  
PQLS OFF or PQLS ON is  
displayed temporarily on your  
player and the sound output is  
discontinued.  
• During playback through an i.LINK connection, if you change the settings for other i.LINK components,  
the sound will be discontinued momentarily. This is not a malfunction.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The program format indicators  
don’t disappear when SACD  
playback stops.  
• The program format indicators remain lit until another format source is input. This is not a malfunction.  
You can’t get i.LINK to display  
when using the SIGNAL SELECT  
button.  
• Make sure your i.LINK source components are switched on.  
• Check that i.LINK is assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
After upgrading a component, it • You may need to reset the i.LINK database memory in the receiver (use the front panel):  
is not recognized and cannot be With the receiver in standby, press ꢁ STANDBY/ON while holding down RETURN. When you see DB  
selected using the i.LINK  
connection.  
CLEAR? appear in the display, press ENTER, then SETUP again to confirm. When you’ve reset the i.LINK  
database memory, DB CLEAR SET shows in the display. If DB ERROR is displayed, step through the  
procedure again.  
i.LINK messages  
You may see the following messages displayed in the front panel display when using the i.LINK interface.  
Message  
Explanation  
BUS FULL  
The i.LINK bus has reached its capacity and cannot transmit any more data.  
CANNOT LINK 1  
The connection between the receiver and the selected i.LINK-equipped component is unstable. If the  
i.LINK cables appear to be connected properly and both the receiver and i.LINK-equipped component are  
on, switch both units off, then on again to re-establish the connection between them.  
CANNOT LINK 2  
LINK CHECK  
LOOP CONNECT  
NO NAME  
The receiver can’t identify the selected i.LINK-equipped component. For example, the receiver may not be  
able to identify an i.LINK-equipped personal computer.  
The receiver is checking the i.LINK network. It does this when components are added to, or removed from  
the network. The sound may be interrupted if this happens during playback.  
The i.LINK network cannot function because the connected components form a loop. See Creating an  
i.LINK network on page 53 for more on this.  
When an i.LINK-equipped component has no name, this message is displayed instead of the proper  
component name.  
NO SIGNAL  
PQLS OFF  
A component is outputting an i.LINK signal that the receiver cannot reproduce. This receiver can only  
reproduce signals from i.LINK-Audio-equipped components. See About i.LINK on page 52 for more on this.  
This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns off during playback. The sound may be  
interrupted momentarily when this happens.  
PQLS ON  
This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns on during playback. The sound may be  
interrupted momentarily when this happens.  
UNKNOWN  
When an i.LINK-equipped component name cannot be recognized, this message is displayed instead of  
the proper component name.  
USB interface  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound.  
• Make sure you have set up your computer system to output through the USB interface (see Using the USB  
interface on page 54).  
• Make sure your computers output level is turned up.  
• Update to a more recent version of your software, try a different audio program, or try a different source.  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The HDMI indicator blinks  
continuously.  
• Check all the points below.  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-  
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-video or composite video jacks.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even  
if it is HDCP-compatible).  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please  
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No picture.  
• If your display device is not SD (480i) compatible then the 480i to HDMI converted video will not be  
displayed. In this case, connect using the component, S-video or composite video jacks.  
• Depending in the output settings of the source component, it may be outputting a video format that can’t  
be displayed. Change the output settings of the source, or connect using the component, S-video or  
composite jacks.  
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the AV options on page 66).  
No sound, or sound suddenly  
ceases.  
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• If analog video is being output over HDMI then there will be no HDMI audio output. Please use a separate  
connection for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
Noisy or distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video  
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on  
the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display  
device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please  
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
iPod messages  
Symptom  
Error I1  
Cause  
Action  
There is a problem with the signal path from the Switch off the receiver and reconnect the iPod to the receiver.  
iPod to the receiver.  
If this doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.  
Error I2  
The software version being used with the iPod  
needs to be updated.  
Update the software being used with the iPod (software  
versions prior to iPod update 2004-10-20 are not supported).  
No Track  
There are no playable songs currently stored in Input some music files compatible with iPod playback.  
the iPod.  
XM radio messages  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action  
Check Antenna  
XM ANT ERR  
The XM antenna is not connected.  
Check that the XM antenna cable is attached securely.  
A short-circuit occurring in the antenna or  
surrounding antenna cable.  
Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the antenna or  
antenna cable. Switch the power off then back on again.  
Updating  
The radio is being updated with the latest  
encryption code.  
Wait until the encryption code has been updated. Channels  
00 and 01 should function normally.  
No Signal  
Loading  
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. n/a  
The receiver is acquiring audio or program  
information.  
Wait until the information has been received.  
Off Air  
The channel currently selected has stopped  
broadcasting.  
Select another channel.  
XM– – –  
You have selected a channel that does not exist, The receiver will automatically switch to channel 001 (or the  
or that you have not subscribed to. last selected channel).  
– – – – – – – –  
There is no artist name/feature, song/program No action needed.  
title, or channel category associated with the  
channel at this time.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
12  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,  
“Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial  
broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
DTS  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system  
from Digital Theater Systems Inc. now widely used for DVD-  
Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and  
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels,  
comprising five full range channels, including an LFE  
channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of  
a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance  
during playback.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system  
widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital  
broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio  
channels, comprising five full range channels and a special  
LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep,  
rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby  
Digital.  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder  
that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1  
gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate  
(discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a  
surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right  
channels. Both sources are also compatible with a  
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.  
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital  
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,  
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates  
and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization,  
attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in  
a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm)  
in order to achieve uniform playback level.  
DTS Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from  
any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from  
5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information  
already encoded into the source, as well as its own  
processing to determine channel localization (with two  
channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by  
bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and  
Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel  
sources.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an  
extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround  
back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right  
channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for  
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as  
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro  
Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the  
innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts  
surround sound from sources as follows:  
DTS 96/24  
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital  
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using  
a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward  
compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD  
players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1  
channel decoder.  
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround)  
from any stereo source  
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround) from any stereo source  
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround and surround back) from two channel or  
5.1(and 6.1) channel sources  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a  
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
®
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver.  
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds  
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,  
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced  
surround listening with greater sound detail.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This  
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—  
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.  
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback with  
sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique WMA  
compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver  
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed  
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio  
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows  
•
THX Select2  
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it  
must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous  
series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product  
feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home  
Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for  
many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of  
the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance  
and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital  
and analog domain.  
®
Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party  
media players on a personal computer, or with an AV  
amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.  
®
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
•
THX Surround EX  
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development  
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film  
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been  
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called  
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the  
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,  
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel  
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the  
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the  
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home  
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the  
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be  
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.  
About THX  
The THX technologies are explained below. See  
www.thx.com for more detailed information.  
•
THX Cinema processing  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by  
the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX  
grew from George Lucas' personal desire to make your experience of  
the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre,  
as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie  
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX  
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this  
new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during  
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the  
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may  
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the  
tastes of the individual listener.  
soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing  
stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with  
similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then  
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not  
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX  
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate  
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,  
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,  
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added  
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).  
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)  
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed  
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal  
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater  
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround  
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and  
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together  
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the  
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the  
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up  
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the  
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.  
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 Cinema, THX  
MusicMode and THX Games Mode.  
•
Re-Equalization  
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and  
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie  
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization  
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in  
a small home environment.  
•
Timbre Matching  
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the  
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is  
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all  
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to  
the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the  
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely  
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front  
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and  
surround speakers.  
•
THX Select2 Cinema mode  
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers  
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,  
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back  
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and  
directional surround sounds.  
•
Adaptive Decorrelation  
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create  
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre  
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround  
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and  
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest  
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive  
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2  
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.  
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital  
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that  
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema  
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.  
•
THX Games Mode  
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX  
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing  
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game  
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately  
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360  
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives  
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.  
•
THX MusicMode  
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be  
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround  
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital  
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.  
The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be  
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
Listening modes with different input signal formats  
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back  
channel processing and decoding method you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
THX  
Auto Surround  
SBch  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
2Pro Logic IIx GAME  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
Processing  
2PRO LOGIC+THX  
ON/AUTO  
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX  
a
(Automatically  
selects 6.1/7.1  
channel decoding)  
b
2PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
THX GAMES MODE  
DTS Surround  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
–
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
Stereo playback  
Other stereo sources  
c
DVD-A and SACD  
SBch  
Processing  
OFF  
(Maximum 5.1  
channel playback)  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
2Pro Logic II MUSIC  
2Pro Logic II GAME  
2PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE+THX  
2PRO LOGIC+THX  
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
a
a
DTS Surround  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
–
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
Stereo playback  
Other stereo sources  
c
DVD-A and SACD  
a.2PRO LOGIC has a maximum of 5.1 channel playback.  
b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
c.VSX-82TXS only – SACD DIRECT is automatically selected with SACD sources.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Multichannel signal formats  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
THX  
Auto Surround  
SBch  
Processing  
ON  
(7.1 channel  
decoding used for  
all sources)  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
WMA+THX CINEMA  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel  
flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
THX SURROUND EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
a
a
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX GAMES MODE  
a
a
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1  
channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS+Neo:6  
a
a
a
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX GAMES MODE  
a
a
DTS and DTS 96/24  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
DTS+Neo:6  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
DTS+Neo:6+THX  
a
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX GAMES MODE  
a
a
Dolby Digital  
WMA9 Pro  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
THX SURROUND EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
a
a
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
a
THX MUSICMODE  
a
THX GAMES MODE  
b
a
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
DVD-A and SACD  
THX MUSICMODE  
a
a
(5.1 channel encoding)  
SBch  
Processing  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
WMA+THX CINEMA  
THX SURROUND EX  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
AUTO  
a
a
(Automatically  
selects 6.1/7.1  
channel decoding)  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1  
channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
Straight decoding  
THX Select2 CINEMA  
Straight decoding  
(Maximum 5.1 channel  
playback)  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback) (Maximum 5.1 channel THX CINEMA  
playback with only one surround back  
speaker)  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
b
a
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
(Maximum 5.1 channel  
playback)  
DVD-A and SACD  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX CINEMA  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
SBch  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Processing  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1  
channel flagged)  
c
OFF  
(Maximum 5.1  
channel playback)  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
b
Straight decoding  
–
Straight decoding  
DVD-A and SACD  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
b.VSX-82TXS only – SACD DIRECT is automatically selected with SACD sources.  
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Stream direct with different input signal formats  
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see  
Using Stream Direct on page 29) you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
Surround Back speaker(s)  
Input signal format  
DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Connected  
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)  
Dolby Digital Surround  
DTS Surround  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
SACD DIRECT (stereo)  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
a
As above  
SACD sources  
Not connected  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)  
Dolby Digital Surround  
DTS Surround  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
SACD DIRECT (stereo)  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
a
As above  
SACD sources  
a.VSX-82TXS only – SACD DIRECT is automatically selected with SACD sources.  
Multichannel signal formats  
Surround Back speaker(s)  
Input signal format  
DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Connected  
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
a
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
As above  
PCM DIRECT  
SACD DIRECT  
b
SACD sources  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
Not connected  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
As above  
As above  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
As above  
PCM DIRECT  
SACD DIRECT  
b
SACD sources  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
b.VSX-82TXS only – SACD DIRECT is automatically selected with SACD sources.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
12  
FM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mono: 20.2 dBf  
Stereo: 38.6 dBf  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 60 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz 1 dB  
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced  
Amplifier section  
Continuous average power output of 140 (or 130)  
watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to  
20 000 Hz with no more than 0.09 %** total harmonic  
distortion (front).  
Continuous Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.09 %)  
Front. . . . 130 W + 130 W (82TXS), 140 W + 140 W (84TXSi)  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W (82TXS), 140 W (84TXSi)  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W (82TXS)  
140 W + 140 W (84TXSi)  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W (82TXS)  
140 W + 140 W (84TXSi)  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 kHz to 1700 kHz  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 µV/m  
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 dB  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna  
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1.0 %)  
Front. . . . 160 W + 160 W (82TXS), 180 W + 180 W (84TXSi)  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W (82TXS), 180 W (84TXSi)  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (82TXS)  
180 W + 180 W (84TXSi)  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (82TXS)  
180 W + 180 W (84TXSi)  
Miscellaneous  
Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 W, 690 VA  
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.65 W  
AC Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (switched) 100 W MAX.  
Dimensions . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 187 (H) mm x 462 (D) mm  
Total harmonic distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 %  
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 120 W, 8 Ω) (82TXS)  
9
3
3
(16 /16 (W) in. x 7 /8 (H) in. x 18 /16 (D) in.)  
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . 16.1 kg (35.5 lb) (84TXSi)  
15.9 kg (35.1 lb) (82TXS)  
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 130 W, 8 Ω) (84TXSi)  
Audio Section  
Furnished Parts  
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . 1  
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/47 kΩ  
Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
VSX-84TXSi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
VSX-82TXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Sub room remote control unit (VSX-84TXSi only) . . . . . . . . . .1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
iPod cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
These operating instructions  
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS. . . . . . . . . +4 dB / +2 dB (100 Hz / 10 kHz)  
(at volume position –40 dB)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 dB  
Note  
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer  
Cleaning the unit  
Composite Video / S-Video Section  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and  
dirt.  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 dB  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 10 MHz  
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth  
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six  
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe  
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleansers.  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or  
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will  
corrode the surface.  
Component Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 dB  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 MHz  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Our philosophy  
12  
•
HDMI and digital video conversion  
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video  
format, providing you high-definition digital video and  
digital audio via a single cable. Also, using this receiver’s  
built-in digital video converter, de-interlacing and up-  
scaling are both possible, and analog video signals can  
be output through the HDMI terminal as digital video.  
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater  
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of  
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they  
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing  
on three important steps:  
•
DCDi  
1
Achieving the highest possible sound quality  
Faroudja’s DCDi Processing is selectable and ensures  
that images are smooth and natural, without staircasing  
or jaggies.  
2
Allowing for customized acoustic calibration  
according to any listening area  
•
iPod and XM Ready  
3
Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-  
1
With the new iPod and XM Radio terminals, you’ll be up  
and running in no time, now that this receiver’s  
enhanced compatibility makes on-screen control of both  
your iPod and XM Radio an added possibility.  
1 With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated  
AIR Studios Monitor Reference:  
class studio engineers  
Features  
•
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC  
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate  
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced  
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This  
innovative technology measures the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to  
customize your system calibration with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or  
using a computer. With the additional benefits of  
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave  
control and microphone measurements from a series of  
reference points, your home theater experience can be  
truly customized for optimal surround sound.  
•
Phase correction  
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this  
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction  
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound  
image at your listening position.  
•
i.LINK digital interface (VSX-84TXSi only)  
The i.LINK interface makes it possible to connect this  
receiver to i.LINK-equipped components, allowing you to  
enjoy high sampling rate (up to 192 kHz) PCM  
multichannel digital audio from DVD-Audio and SACD  
discs, as well as digital audio from DVD-Video, CD and  
Video CD discs, all with a single cable.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will  
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since  
hearing damage from loud noise is often  
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of  
sound levels is included for your protection.  
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit  
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your  
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how  
you can maximize the fun and excitement your  
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the  
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of  
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that  
lets the sound come through loud and clear without  
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,  
without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30 Quiet library, soft whispers  
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic  
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.  
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and  
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by  
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your  
hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS  
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,  
thunderclap  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane  
180 Rocket launching pad  
Once you have established a comfortable sound  
level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we  
want you listening for a lifetime.  
S001_En  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer  
Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement parts,  
operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown  
below.  
8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4  
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support  
Division at the above listed number for assistance.  
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.  
Customer Support Division  
P. O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,  
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian  
Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.  
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
Customer Satisfaction Department  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2  
1(877)283-5901  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé  
Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus près  
de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:  
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.  
Service à la clientèle  
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2  
1(877)283-5901  
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la  
garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.  
S018_A_EF  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_A_En  
<06C00001>  
Printed in  
<XRB3066-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Patton electronic Switch 593 45 593 TB RS 422 RS 485 User Manual
Philips Bluetooth Headset SHB7102 User Manual
Philips Digital Camera SPC220NC User Manual
Philips Log Splitter SWV2001 User Manual
Philips VCR VR1000 User Manual
Pioneer Car Stereo System P6800MP User Manual
Pixel Magic Systems TV Cables SE150 DH User Manual
Polk Audio Computer Monitor MX75 User Manual
Poulan Chainsaw 2002 06 User Manual
Precisionaire Air Cleaner Alpha 95 User Manual